Home

CPM2C-S - Valtek

1. PC Setup Section 4 6 4 1 2 I O Memory Area Attributes Area Exter Mode change Fatal error Startup Power ON Force nal l O toorfrom FALS 07 Other cause ResetlOM Maintain IOM Set alloca PROGRAM 07 ae Hold Bit TEN Force tion Reset IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Input area Yes Clear Hold Hold Hold Clear Hold Clear Clear Clear Hold OK IR 000 to IR 009 Output area Yes Clear Hold Hold Hold Clear Hold Clear Clear Clear Hold OK IR 010 to IR 019 CompoBus S input area No Clear Hold Hold Hold Clear Hold Clear Clear Clear Hold OK IR 020 to IR 027 CompoBus S output area No Clear Hold Hold Hold Clear Hold Clear Clear Clear Hold OK IR 030 to IR 037 Work areas No Clear Hold Hold Hold Clear Hold Clear Clear Clear Hold OK IR 028 IR 029 IR 030 to IR 049 IR 220 to IR 227 SR area No SR 228 to SR 255 HR area No Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold OK HR 00 to HR 19 AR area No OK AR 00 to AR 23 LR area No Clear Hold Hold Hold Clear Hold Clear Clear Clear Hold OK LR 00 to LR 15 Timer Completion Flags No Hold
2. ind 5 Press the SHIFT and CLR Keys to end monitoring altogethe Note Press the SHIFT Key CLR Key and then CLR Key again to return to the initial Programming Console display with the multiple address monitoring state unchanged Press the SHIFT Key and then the MONTR Key from the initial dis play to return to the multiple address monitoring state The monitoring states can be retained for 6 bits and words The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode 8 4 13 Differentiation Monitor This operation is used to monitor the up or down differentiation status of a particular bit When detected the up or down differentiation will be displayed and the buzzer will sound It is possible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 2 3 1 Monitor the status of the desired bit according to the procedure described in 8 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor lf 2 or more bits are being monitored the de sired bit should be leftmost on the display 184 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 In this case the differentiation status of LR 00 will be monitored 2 To specify up differentiation monitoring press the SHIFT and then the Up Arrow Key The symbols U will appear qe I Indicates waiting for the bit to turn ON To specify down differentiation monitoring
3. Leading word 00 to 07 The error code 2 digits that is output to AR 253 bits 00 to 07 is output 08 and 09 CPM2C operating mode Bit 09 08 PROGRAM mode 0 0 MONITOR mode 1 0 RUN mode 1 1 10 Not used 11 UM area write protection Mirrors the status of PC Setup setting in DM 6602 bits 00 to 03 OFF UM writable ON UM write protected 12 and 13 Not used 14 ON when a non fatal error has occurred 15 ON when a fatal error has occurred Leading word 00 to 03 Not used 1 04 ON when a battery error has occurred Effective only when detection of battery errors is enabled with the PC Setup setting in DM 6655 bits 12 to 15 set to 0 05 ON when a cycle time overrun error has occurred 06 Not used 07 ON when FAL 06 was executed or a PC Setup settings error has occurred The FAL number is transmitted in bits 00 to 07 of the leading word 08 ON when a memory error has occurred 09 ON when there isn t an END 01 instruction in the program 10 Not used 11 ON when an I O Unit over error too many Units has been detected 12 and 13 Not used 14 ON when an I O bus error has occurred 15 ON when FALS 07 was executed 134 The FAL number is transmitted in bits 00 to 07 of the leading word Note If words in any areas other than the IR area IR 000 to IR 227 or LR area LR 00 to LR 15 are allocated to the I O Link Read area the data may not be cleared even when the power is inte
4. 0 0 cece eee eee eee 6 3 1 DeviceNet Explicit Message Functions 0 00 0 erreneren 6 3 2 Command and Response Formats 00 0 rrer eee eee eee 6 3 3 Examples of DeviceNet Explicit Messages 0 0 00 00000000 6 4 Status Information 0 ec cee eee e eens 6 4 1 LED Indicators cessc oaea Sig os A aa Se ee at ete 6 4 2 AR Area Flags indicating DeviceNet Status 000 0000 6 4 3 CPM2C S Status Output to DeviceNet 00 0 eee eee eee 115 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 6 1 Initial Settings 6 1 1 Setting the Node Number Set the DeviceNet node number with the rotary switches on the front of the Unit The allowed setting range is 00 to 63 node number settings 64 to 99 are not al lowed The rotary switch settings are read when the Unit s power is turned ON 6 1 2 Setting the Communications Speed Set the DeviceNet communications speed with DIP switch 2 on the front of the Unit The DIP switch settings are read when the Unit s power is turned ON fgg e HNO DIP switch 2 settings DeviceNet Maximum total Pin 1 Pin 2 communications speed communications distance 125 kbps 500 m max 250 kbps 250 m max 500 kbps 100 m max Not used 6 1 3 Attaching Status Information It is possible to enable and disable the attachment of the CPM2C S status infor mation in transmissions from the CPM2C S to the
5. 146 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 Expansion Instructions without Default Function Codes Code Mnemonic ON execution Conditions Top min bottom max OFF execution time us time us ACC 66 5 When specifying a word in independent mode 2 6 and CW CCW mode 92 1 When specifying DM in independent mode and CW CCW mode 66 2 When specifying a word in independent mode and Feed Dir mode 92 2 When specifying DM in independent mode and Feed Dir mode 65 5 When executing the word designation in CW continuous mode and CW CCW mode 75 0 When executing the DM designation in CW continuous mode and CW CCW mode 45 4 When changing the word designation in CW continuous mode and CW CCW mode 53 8 When changing the DM designation in CW continuous mode and CW CCW mode 65 5 When executing the word designation in CCW continuous mode and CW CCW mode 75 0 When executing the DM designation in CCW continuous mode and CW CCW mode 45 5 When changing the word designation in CCW continuous mode and CW CCW mode 53 6 When changing the DM designation in CCW continuous mode and CW CCW mode 65 0 When executing the word designation in CW continuous mode and Feed Dir mode 74 5 When executing the DM designation in CW continuous mode and Feed Dir mode 45 4 When changing the word designation in CW continuous mode and Feed Dir mode 53 5 When ch
6. DM 6652 00 to 15 Transmission delay 0000 to 9999 BCD sets a delay of 0 to 99 990 ms Any other setting specifies a delay of 0 ms causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302 DM 6653 00 to 07 Node number Host Link 00 to 31 BCD Any other setting specifies a node number of 00 causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302 08 to 11 Start code selection for no protocol communications 0 Hex Disables start code 1 Hex Enables start code in DM 6649 Any other setting disables the start code causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302 12 to 15 End code selection for no protocol communications 0 Hex Disables end code 1 Hex Enables end code in DM 6649 2 Hex Sets end code of CR LF Any other setting disables the end code causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302 DM 6654 00 to 07 Start code 00 to FF This setting is valid only when bits 8 to 11 of DM 6648 are set to 1 08 to 15 When bits 12 to 15 of DM 6648 set to 0 Sets the number of bytes to receive 00 256 bytes 01 to FF 1 to 255 bytes When bits 12 to 15 of DM 6648 set to 1 Sets the end code 00 to FF 101 PC Setup Section 4 6 Word s Bit s Function Error Log Settings DM 6655 The following settings are read regularly by the CPU while the PC is ON DM 6655 00 to 03 Style 0 Hex Shift after 7 records have been stored 1 Hex Store only first 7 records no shifting 2
7. Instance ID 0001 Hex specifies data area Starting write address 000A Hex specifies IR 010 Address L 0A Hex Address H 00 Hex These words contain the data to be written to slave words IR 010 to IR 029 When the WRITE BYTE DATA command is executed from an OMRON Master the bytes are written to the Slave in the same order HH LL in which they appear in the Master Contents Function Hex Master Unit s unit number 00 Number of words of command data beginning with word S 29 BCD specifies 29 words 130 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 e Response Words The results are stored as follows Contents Function Hex DM 2000 28 01 EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code 2801 Hex DM 2001 0000 Normal completion code 0000 Hex DM 2002 00 02 Number of bytes received 02 Hex indicates 2 bytes This is the number of bytes from D 3 to the end DM 2003 02 9E Slave s node number 02 Hex READ BYTE DATA response service code 9E Hex 131 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 6 4 Status Information The status of DeviceNet communications is indicated by the CPM2C S PC s LED indicators and AR area flags In addition the PC Setup can be set so that the CPM2C S PC s operating status information is attached to remote I O trans missions from the CPM2C S to the Master Unit 6 4 1 LED Indicators The status of Device
8. Parameter Name ale d 0001 Max number of CompoBus S t 32 Node 0002 CompoBus S communications High Speed Communication 0003 PLC status ON OFF ON 0004 Write area siz 16 byte 0005 Write area name clo 0 49 000G Write Address 30 ch 0007 Read Size 16 byte 0008 Read Area clo 0 49 0009 Read Address 20 ch wat s fed Help Set the Write size byte Master gt Default 16 byte CPM2C S Min 0 byte Max 64 byte Zi Upload Download Compare Reset Default Setup Cancel b Enter the desired value and press the Enter Key 7 When all parameters are set as required click the Download Button 8 After the download has been completed click the OK Button to return to the list display 6 3 Explicit Message Communications 6 3 1 DeviceNet Explicit Message Functions Explicit message communications use a command response protocol The CPM2C S returns responses to commands sent from the Master allowing CPM2C S data areas to be read or written from the Master Command message DeviceNet Master Response message 119 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 Explicit Message List Note Explicit message Function READ BYTE DATA Reads the specified node s data in byte units from 120 the DeviceNet Master When word data is being read the leftmost byte is read before the rightmost byte Up to 200 bytes can be read at one time WRITE BYTE DATA Writes
9. Class ID command Always 2F Hex Instance ID command Specify the data area where data will be written Specify one of the codes listed in the following table in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal Area name Address range IR area IR 000 to IR 049 IR area IR 200 to IR 227 DM area DM 0000 to DM 2047 LR area LR 00 to LR 15 HR area HR 00 to HR 19 Timer Counter area TC 000 to TC 255 Address L and Address H command Specify the starting word address where data will be written Specify the address in hexadecimal as follows Address L The rightmost two digits of the 4 digit starting address Address H The leftmost two digits of the 4 digit starting address Write data command Contains the data that will be written in the specified data area Input word data with the leftmost byte bits 8 to 15 preceding the rightmost byte bits O to 7 Number of bytes received response Indicates the number of bytes of data in hexadecimal from the source node number on Source node number response Indicates the node number in hexadecimal of the CPM2C S that returned the response Precautions The range of data specified by the data area instance ID starting address Ad dress L and Address H and write data parameters must not exceed the range of the CPM2C S data area The CPM2C S returns an error response when there is an error in the explicit message command sent from the DeviceNet Master 125
10. Source node number response Indicates the node number in hexadecimal of the CPM2C S that returned the response Read data response Contains the desired data read from the specified data area Word data is re turned with the leftmost byte bits 8 to 15 preceding the rightmost byte bits 0 to 7 Precautions The range of data specified by the data area instance ID starting address Ad dress L and Address H and number of words parameters must not exceed the range of the CPM2C S data area Writes data from the DeviceNet Master to the specified node s data area in word units two byte units When word data is being written the leftmost byte is writ ten before the rightmost byte Up to 100 words can be written at one time Command Format e ae TE cence bd Class ID Address i stl Leftmost al Service code Instance ID Address H Rightmost byte Rightmost byte Destination node number 124 Write data 200 bytes max Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 ERROR RESPONSE Response Format Tp Service code Source node number Number of bytes received Parameters Destination node number command Specify the node number of the CPM2C S where the data will be written Specify the node number in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal Service code command response Specify 1F Hex in the command The leftmost bit of the service code is turned ON in the response so 9F Hex is returned
11. Used as high speed counter inputs Used as a normal input Special functions for input bits IR 00003 and IR 00004 are set in DM 6628 Bit Bits in address DM 6628 IR 00003 00 to 03 PC Setup setting in DM 6628 Used as quick response inputs Used as interrupt inputs including counter mode Used as normal inputs IR 00004 04 to 07 83 PC Setup Section 4 6 CompoBus S I O Areas Work Bits SR Area TR Area HR Area AR Area LR Area Timer Counter Area DM Area 84 2 Output bits IR 01000 and IR 01001 can operate as normal inputs or they can be used for pulse outputs with PULS 65 SYNC or PWM Use a CPU Unit with transistor outputs for the pulse output functions Instruction Function PULS 65 With SPED 64 Single phase pulse output without acceleration or deceleration With ACC Single phase pulse output with trapezoidal acceleration and deceleration SYNC Synchronized pulse control output PWM Variable duty ratio pulse output IR area bits from IR 02000 to IR 02715 the input area and IR 03000 to IR 03715 the output area are allocated to CompoBus S Slaves IR words that are not al located to CompoBus S inputs or outputs can be used as work words The work bits can be used freely within the program They can only be used with in the program however and not for direct external I O These bits mainly s
12. 66 SCL SCL 67 BCNT BCNT 68 BCMP BCMP 69 STIM STIM 87 DSW 88 7SEG 89 INT INT If a CQM1 instruction that is not supported by the CPM2C S is used in the pro gram an error will occur when the program is transferred from the computer to the PC There are four CPM2C S instructions STUP SYNC TIML and TMHH that are not supported by the CQM1 These instructions can be used by transferring the expansion instructions from the CPM2C S to the SSS This procedure is outlined in the following 1 Select Transfer Instr from the Utility menu 2 Confirm the transfer by pressing Y when the confirmation pop up is dis played Fi deil EO GC ee See fe miiy 1 E Brr op mam imine ima cee UT bes comer 3 The Utility menu will be displayed again when the transfer is completed Since some of the CPM2C S PC Setup settings are different from those in the CQM1 not all settings can be made from the menus These settings have to be made by writing data directly to the word containing the setting 165 Using a Programming Console Section 8 3 8 3 Using a Programming Console This section provides information on connecting and using a Programming Con sole Refer to 9 3 Programming Console Operation Errors for details on errors that might occur during Programming Console operations 8 3 1 Connecting the Programming Console The following diagram show
13. Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold OK T000 to T255 Timer PVs No Hold Hold2 Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold No T000 to T255 Counter Completion No Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold OK Flags C000 to C255 Counter PVs No Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold No C000 to C255 DM area No Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold Hold No Read Write DM 0000 to DM 1999 DM 2022 to DM 2047 Error Log DM 2000 to DM 2021 Read only DM 6144 to DM 6599 PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 86 Note 1 The PC Setup setting in DM 6601 bits 08 to 11 determines whether the IOM Hold Bit is reset turned OFF at startup 2 Timer PVs and Completion Flags are maintained when the CPM2C S is switched to PROGRAM mode from RUN mode or MONITOR mode but cleared when the CPM2C S is switched from PROGRAM mode to RUN mode or MONITOR mode Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 4 2 4 2 1 CPU Units 1 O Allocation for CPM2C S PCs This section shows how I O bits are actually allocated to the input and output terminals on the CPU Unit and Expansion I O Units Bits in the words that are not allocated to I O can be used as work bits Input bits are allocated starting from IR 00000 and output bits are allocated start ing from IR 01000 In the following diagra
14. b The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the previous or next word s bits 3 Press the CLR Key to end binary monitoring and return to the normal moni toring display 8 4 15 Three Word Monitor 1 2 3 This operation is used to monitor the status of three consecutive words It is possible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 Monitor the status of the first of the three words according to the procedure described in 8 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor If 2 or more words are being monitored the desired first word should be left most on the display Word monitor a 2 Press the EXT Key to begin 3 word monitoring The status of the selected word and the next two words will be displayed as shown below In this case DM 0000 was selected EXT The Up and Down Arrow Keys can be used to shift one address up or down The status of the displayed words can be changed at this point Refer to 8 4 18 Three word Data Modification The display can be changed to display ASCII text which is useful when three consecutive words containing an ASCII message are displayed Refer to 8 4 26 Hex ASCIl Display Change 3 Press the CLR Key to end 3 word monitoring and return to the normal moni toring display The rightmost word on the 3 word monitor display will be monitored Note The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display
15. is not displayed B 2 8 4 5 Assigning Expansion Instruction Function Codes 1 2 3 This operation is used to display or change the expansion instructions assigned to expansion instruction function codes The assignments can be displayed in any mode but can be changed in PROGRAM mode only omron RUN MONTOR PROGRAM Read assignment OK Change assignment OK Assign expansion instruction function codes before inputting the program The CPM2C S will not operate properly if expansion instructions aren t as signed correctly An expansion instruction can be assigned to one function code only The PC Setup must be set for user defined expansion instruction assign ments Set bits 8 to 11 of DM 6602 to 1 and turn the PC s power off and then on again to enable the new setting There is a table on page 157 showing the default function code assignments in the CPM2C S 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the EXT Key to display the assignment for the first function code 17 EXT 3 Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the expansion instruc tion function codes 4 Press the CHG Key to assign a different expansion instruction to the selec ted function code 5 Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the expansion instruc tions that can be assigned to the selected function co
16. 02 Hex RUN mode 17 CPM2C S Structure and Operation Section 1 3 Note 1 The operating mode at startup depends upon the setting of DIP switch pin 4 and the Programming Device connected to the communications port pe ripheral port Programming Device Pin 4 OFF PindON None PROGRAM mode RUN mode Programming Console Operating mode set on the Programming Console s mode switch Other device PROGRAM mode The default setting for bits 08 to 15 of DM 6600 is 00 If this default setting is used and pin 4 is OFF the CPM2C S will automatically start operating in RUN mode when the power is turned ON 2 If pin 4 is OFF and only an RS 232C cable is connected to the communica tions port i e there is no peripheral port connection the CPM2C S will au tomatically start operating in RUN mode when the power is turned ON Example Cable Connections CS1W CN118 and XW2Z 200S 500S CS1W CN118 and XW2Z 200S V 500S V CPM2C CN111 and XW2Z 200S 500S no peripheral port connection CPM2C CN111 and XW2Z 200S V 500S V no peripheral port connection 1 3 4 PC Operation at Startup Time Required for Initialization Power OFF Operation 18 1 2 3 The time required for startup initialization depends on several factors such as the operating conditions including power supply voltage system configuration and ambient temperature and the program contents Minimum Power Supply Voltage The PC will
17. 100 000 operations Mechanical 20 000 000 operations Battery CPM2C BAT01 2 years at 25 C Required Tools 218 Note Power supply voltage range Power supply Allowable voltage fluctuation range 100 to 240 VAC CPM2C PA201 only 85 to 264 VAC 24 VDC 20 4 to 26 4 VDC Standard Tools Required e Screwdrivers Phillips and flat blade e Voltage tester or digital voltage meter e Industrial alcohol and a cotton cloth Measurement Devices May be Needed e Synchroscope e Cathode ray oscilloscope e Thermometer hygrometer Note Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify the PC in any way Battery Replacement Section 9 7 9 7 Battery Replacement N WARNING The backup battery may explode catch fire or leak if dropped broken apart 1 2 3 crushed short circuited recharged heated to 100 C or higher or burned If power has not been supplied to the PC for some time turn ON the power sup ply for at least 5 minutes to charge the backup capacitor before replacing the battery Turn OFF the power supply to the PC before replacing the battery To protect the contents of memory this procedure must be completed within 5 minutes A label has been included to remind the user when the battery needs to be re placed After replacing the battery write the next date that the battery should be replaced on the label and affix the label in a visible place such as the inside of th
18. 62 Mnemonic PRV ON execution Conditions Top min bottom max time us 36 9 Reading high speed counter PV via word 44 7 Reading high speed counter PV DM 36 6 Specifying increment mode via word 44 3 Specifying increment mode via D 38 5 Specifying a word when using synchronized control 46 2 Specifying DM when using synchronized con trol 20 2 Reading high speed counter pulse output status via word 27 4 Reading high speed counter pulse output status via DM 24 4 Reading high speed counter read range com parison results via word 32 4 Reading high speed counter read range com parison results via DM 39 9 Reading pulse output PV via word 47 8 Reading pulse output PV via DM 20 1 Reading interrupt counter PV via word 27 1 Reading interrupt counter PV via DM OFF execution time us 2 6 143 One to one PC Link I O Response Time 63 Mnemonic CTBL ON execution time us 186 0 Conditions Top min bottom max Registering a target value comparison table and starting comparison in incrementing decrement ing pulse input mode via word 807 5 Registering a target value comparison table and starting comparison in incrementing decrement ing pulse input mode via DM 185 8 Registering a target value comparison table and starting comparison in incrementing mode via word 781 9 Registering a target value comparison table and st
19. SECTION 5 Exchanging Data with CompoBus S Slaves This section explains how to exchange data with CompoBus S Slaves when using the CPM2C S as a CompoBus S Master Read this section when using CompoBus S I O link communications ofl Initial Settings n a cn ed ae Sam een Ra eh i ho eh apa eae we eR 5 1 1 Setting the Maximum Number of Nodes 0 00 00 0000005 5 1 2 Setting the CompoBus S Communications Mode 0 5 2 Remote I O Communications 0 cece ete e teen eens O21 Slaves acta na eendt aoe Ee dee eh a Ee ee ee Be 5 22 WO Allocation ke ccees gages eget bos riepen o N EER T ee RE REE eS 5 3 Communications Status 0 0 cece eee nee eee ene ne E E 109 Communications Status Section 5 3 5 1 Initial Settings 5 1 1 Setting the Maximum Number of Nodes The maximum number of Slaves that can be connected through CompoBus S can be set to 16 or 32 Slaves CPMac S CompoBus S communications path EHH o Terminator a Be Fi Slave Slave Slave 16 or 32 Slaves max Use a Programming Device to set the maximum number of Slaves in DM 6603 of the PC Setup as shown in the following table Function DM 6603 00 to 03 Sets the max number of 0 Hex 32 Slaves Oor1 0 CompoBus S Slaves to 16 or 32 1 Hex 16 Slaves 32 Slaves Note 1 Always turn the power OFF and ON again after changing this setting 2 The communications response time is affected by the max
20. SYSMAC CPM2C S CPM2C S100C S110C S100C DRT S110C DRT Programmable Controller OPERATION MANUAL OMRON CPM2C S Programmable Controller Operation Manual Produced November 2000 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property N DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Z N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Z N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PC means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for an
21. The multiple for the peripheral process such as tool feed rate can be changed during operation by calculating the multiple from another input value such as an encoder in the peripheral process This method can be used to change the process for different products or models without stopping the equipment Reliably receive input pulses with an ON time shorter than the cycle Quick response input function time such as inputs from a photomicrosensor 23 Functions Listed by Usage Section 1 4 Usage Function Refer to Interrupt functions Execute a special process very quickly when an input goes ON For example operating a cutter when an interrupt input is received from a Proximity Switch or Photoelectric Switch Interrupt input interrupt input mode Count input ON pulses and execute a special process very quickly when the count reaches the preset value For example stopping the supply feed when a preset number of workpieces have passed through the system Interrupt input counter mode Execute a special process at a preset count value For example cutting material very precisely at a given length High speed counter interrupt generated when the count matches the set value Execute a special process when the count is within a preset range For example sorting material very quickly when it is within a given length range High speed counter interrupt generat
22. black CAN L white hy V red DeviceNet Connectors Use the DeviceNet connectors shown in the following table OMRON XW4B 05C1 H1 D Connector with securing screws included with the CPM2C S OMRON XW4B 05C4 TF D Connector for multi drop connections see note 1 74 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Note 1 Use the XW4B 05C4 T1 D Connector when wiring multi drop connections with thick cable 2 Phoenix Contact connectors can be purchased through OMRON Tsufo Ser vice Company Use the following OMRON screwdriver when wiring DeviceNet connectors XW4Z 00C Co ee 2A L as eee 0 6enm 3 4 9 Programming Device Connections Programming Console Use one of the connecting cables shown in the following diagram to connect a Programming Console to the CPM2C S Main cable 2 m Peripheral port CPM2C S CQM1H PROO1 E r with attached 2 m cable k oe zi A F ph CPM2C CN111 0 15 m CQM1 PROO1 E Main cable 2 m t CS1W CN114 0 05 m with attached 2 m cable Jm T E C200H CN222 2 m C200H CN422 4 m CS1W CN224 2 m C200H PRO27 E CS1W CN624 6 m 75 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 One to one Computer Use one of the connecting cables shown in the following diagram to connect a Connection personal computer with Support Software to the CPM2C S RS 232C port for 1 1 Host Link communications or no protocol serial communications RS
23. by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode 8 4 16 Signed Decimal Monitor 186 1 2 3 This operation converts the contents of the specified word from signed hexa decimal two s complement format to signed decimal for display The opera tion can be executed while using I O monitoring multiple address monitoring or 3 word monitoring RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 Monitor the word that is to be used for decimal monitor with sign During mul tiple address monitoring the leftmost word will be converted Multiple address monitor Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 2 Press the SHIFT TR Keys to display the leftmost word as signed decimal SHET At this point the contents of the displayed word can be changed with a signed decimal input Refer to 8 4 22 Signed Decimal Data Modification 3 Press the CLR Key or the SHIFT TR Keys to end the unsigned decimal dis play and return to normal monitoring 8 4 17 Unsigned Decimal Monitor 1 2 3 This operation is used to convert hexadecimal data in a word to unsigned decimal for display The operation can be executed while using I O monitor ing multiple address monitoring or 3 word monitoring Run MONITOR PROGRAM 1 Monitor the word that is to be used for decimal monitor without sign During multiple address monitoring the leftmost word will be converted Multiple a
24. normal operating mode The CPM2C S operating status can be monitored from a Programming Device but bits can t be force set force reset and the SV PV of timers and counters can t be changed Check the system thoroughly before changing the operating mode of the PC to prevent any accidents that might occur when the program is first started Never change the mode while pressing any of the keys The operating mode of the CPM2C S when the power is turned ON depends upon the PC Setup settings in DM 6600 the setting of DIP switch pin 4 and the mode set on the Programming Console s mode switch if a Programming Con sole is connected See 1 3 3 Operating Mode at Startup for details 8 3 4 Preparation for Operation 170 N Caution This section describes the procedures required to begin Programming Console operation when using the Programming Console for the first time Always confirm that the Programming Console is in PROGRAM mode when turning ON the PC with a Programming Console connected unless another mode is desired for a specific purpose If the Programming Console is in RUN mode when PC power is turned ON any program in Program Memory will be executed possibly causing a PC controlled system to begin operation Using a Programming Console Section 8 3 The following sequence of operations must be performed before beginning ini tial program input 1 2 3 1 Be sure that the PC is OFF 2 Connect the Programming Cons
25. o o Write output data to CompoBus S Remote I O Slaves o Read input data from input bits Write output data to output bits o o Exchange I O data with DeviceNet Master CPM2C S1LJ0C DRT versions only o Perform explicit message communications with DeviceNet Master CPM2C S1LJ0C DRT versions only o Perform RS 232C port communications processing Can be changed in DM 6616 o Perform peripheral port communications processing Can be changed in DM 6617 1 The cycle time can be read using a Programming Device 2 The maximum cycle time and current cycle time are stored in AR 14 and AR 15 respectively One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 Process Overseeing 3 The cycle time varies with the processing required and so it is possible that the calculated value and the actual value may not be the same Content Set cycle watchdog timer check I O bus check UM refresh clock refresh bits allocated to new functions Time requirements 0 3 ms Wait for completion of CompoBus S communications Wait for completion of the CompoBus S com munications started in the CompoBus S output refreshing process CompoBus S input refreshing Read input data from CompoBus S Master ASIC 0 02 ms Program execution Execute user program Total time for executing instructions Varies according to content of user s program Cyc
26. to start the software 2 Read the notes provided in the startup messages and click OK a 3 The SYSMAC CPT Support Software will start ga le e o Bis je Note To exit from the SYSMAC CPT Support Software select File F from the menu 158 bar and Exit X from the File menu SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 8 1 Creating a New Project Follow this procedure when using SYSMAC CPT Support Software for the first time or creating a new project Specify the PC model and CPU version of the PC being used 1 2 3 1 Select File F from the menu bar and New N from the File menu gt Tiler Sm 2 Input the name of the new project set the PC model to CQM1 set the CPU version to CPU43 and click OK Pumm el a Input the T project name l d Click OK b Set the PC model to CQM1 c Set the PC model to CQM1 3 The new project s ladder diagram will be displayed E APE 159 SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 8 1 Writing and Editing the Ladder Program The SYSMAC CPT Support Software can display programs in ladder diagram format or mnemonic format To switch the display editing format select View V from the menu bar Program editor P and then Ladder L or Mnemonic M Transferring the Program 160 Refer to 3 4 9 Programming Device Connections for details on connecting the CPM2C S to a persona
27. 01000 Motor driver Pulse output 1 Pulse output 1 01001 01001 COM COM 24V 24 V Pulse plus direction output Increment pulse output CPM2C S Motor driver CPM2C S Motor driver Pulse output 0 Q 01000 CW pulse output 01000 Direction input COW input O Direction output Q 1 O CCW pulse output 01001 Note CW is clockwise and CCW is counter clockwise Output Wiring Observe the following precautions to protect the PC s internal components Precautions Output Short Protection The output or internal circuitry might be damaged when the load connected to an 71 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 output is short circuited so it is recommended to install a protective fuse in each output circuit Inductive Loads When connecting an inductive load to an input connect a surge protector or diode in parallel with the load The surge protector s components should have the following ratings Transistor Output Sinking OUT CPM2C S Diode _COM Transistor Output Sourcing ett OUT CPM2C S Diode _COM The diode should satisfy the following requirements Peak reverse breakdown voltage must be at least 3 times the load voltage Average rectified current must be 1 A Inrush Current Considerations When a CPM2C S transistor output is used to switch a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent lamp suppress the inrush current as
28. 10 6 Stopping timer 70 XFER 21 3 When transferring a constant to a word 2 6 23 8 When transferring a word to a word 1 52 ms When transferring 2 048 words using DM 71 BSET 13 8 When setting a constant to a word 2 6 14 3 When setting a word to a word 971 1 When setting DM to 2 048 words 73 XCHG 14 5 Word word 2 6 29 3 DM gt DM 74 SLD 12 3 Shifting 1 word 2 6 23 9 Shifting 10 words 2 83 ms Shifting 2 048 words using DM 75 SRD 12 3 Shifting 1 word 2 6 23 9 Shifting 10 words 2 83 ms Shifting 2 048 words using DM 76 MLPX 16 8 When decoding word to word 2 6 46 1 When decoding DMto DM 77 DMPX 19 7 When encoding word to word 2 6 52 1 When encoding DM to DM 78 SDEC 19 8 When decoding word to word 2 6 48 3 When decoding DM to DM 80 DIST 18 7 When setting a constant to a word a word 2 6 20 2 When setting a word to a word a word 43 1 When setting DMto DM DM 31 0 When setting a constant to a stack 32 7 When setting a word to a stack 55 9 When setting DM to a stack via DM 145 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 Code Mnemonic ON execution Conditions Top min bottom max OFF execution time us time us 81 COLL 21 5 When setting a constant a word to a word 2 6 21 9 When setting a word a word to a word 42 5 When setting DM DMto DM 31 5 When setting
29. CPM2C PA201 to a torque of 0 74 to 0 9 Nem Loose screws may result in burning or malfunction Do not connect the 24 VDC output service power supply or the Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 to an AC power supply Connecting it to an AC power sup ply will damage the internal circuit 4 Operating Environment Precautions N Caution N Caution Do not operate the control system in the following places e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tempera ture e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise xiii Application Precautions 5 xiv Z N Caution e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity e Locations close to power supplies The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the lon gevity and reliability of the system Improper operating environments can lead to malfunction failure and other unforeseeable problems w
30. Connects the CPU Unit to the CompoBus S transmission line 4 DeviceNet Communications Connector 41 Unit Components Section 2 2 42 Connects the CPU Unit to the DeviceNet transmission line Use the connec tor included with the CPU Unit or an equivalent connector to connect to the DeviceNet transmission line 5 PC Status Indicators The following indicators show the operating status of the PC Indicator Status Meaning PWR ON Power is being supplied to the PC green OFF Power isn t being supplied to the PC RUN ON The PC is operating in RUN or MONITOR mode green OFF The PC is in PROGRAM mode or a fatal error has occurred ERR ALM ON A fatal error has occurred PC operation stops red Flashing A non fatal error has occurred PC operation continues OFF Indicates normal operation SD Flashing Data is being transmitted via CompoBus S yellow OFF Data isn t being transmitted via CompoBus S RD Flashing Data is being received via CompoBus S yellow OFF Data isn t being received via CompoBus S ERC Flashing A CompoBus S communications error occurred red OFF A CompoBus S communications error hasn t occurred COMM Flashing Data is being transferred via the communications port yellow peripheral or RS 232C OFF Data isn t being transferred via communications port The following indicators show the status Devi
31. Function CPM2C S DeviceNet Status AR 00 CompoBus S Active Slave Flags AR 04 to AR 07 and Communications Error Flags CompoBus S Master ASIC Error AR 1315 PC Setup Differences Function CPM2C S Maximum number of DM 6603 bits 00 to 03 CompoBus S nodes CompoBus S communications DM 6603 bits 04 to 07 mode DeviceNet Read Write area DM 6605 bits 00 to 03 Default or DM 6606 to DM 6609 DeviceNet I O Link Write Area DM 6606 bits 00 to 07 data area DeviceNet I O Link Write Area DM 6606 bits 08 to 15 number of bytes DeviceNet I O Link Write Area DM 6607 bits 00 to 15 starting address DeviceNet I O Link Read Area DM 6608 bits 00 to 07 data area DeviceNet I O Link Read Area DM 6608 bits 08 to 15 number of bytes DeviceNet I O Link Read Area DM 6609 bits 00 to 15 starting address 1 6 Preparation for Operation Follow the steps listed below when setting up a CPM2C S system 1 2 3 1 System Design e Select a CPM2C S CPU Unit Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units with the specifications required in the controlled system e Design external fail safe circuits such as interlock circuits and limit circuits Refer to 2 1 Specifications and 3 1 Design Precautions for details 2 Installation e Connect the Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units e Install the CPU Unit DIN track installation Refer to 3 3 Installing the CPM2C and 3 4 Wiring and Connections for de tai
32. Hex Enable CTS control Any other setting will cause a non fatal error and AR 1302 will turn ON 08 to 11 Link words for 1 1 data link 0 Hex LR 00 to LR 15 Any other settings are ineffective 12 to 15 Communications mode 0 Hex Host Link 1 Hex No protocol 2 Hex 1 1 PC Link Slave 3 Hex 1 1 PC Link Master 4 Hex NT Link Any other setting causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302 00 to 07 Baud rate 00 Hex 1 200 bps 01 Hex 2 400 bps 02 Hex 4 800 bps 03 Hex 9 600 bps 04 Hex 19 200 bps 08 to 15 Frame format Start bits Data bits Stop bits Parity 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Even 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Odd 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit None Hex 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Even Hex 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Odd Hex 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits None Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Even Hex 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Odd Hex 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit None Hex 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Even Hex 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Odd 11 Hex 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits None Any other setting specifies standard settings 1 start bit 7 data bits even parity 2 stop bits 9 600 bps causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302 00 to 15 Transmission delay 0000 to 9999 BCD sets a delay of 0 to 99 990 ms Any other setting specifies a delay of 0 ms causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302 00 to 07 Node number Host Link 00 to 31 BCD 000000000
33. INO to IN15 are the node addresses for the Input Terminals and OUTO to OUT15 are the node addresses for the Output Terminals Word Relay numbers Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 877 6 5432 1 0 Input IR 020 IN1 INO IR 021 IN3 IN2 IR 022 IN5 IN4 IR 023 IN7 IN6 IR 024 IN9 IN8 IR 025 IN11 IN10 IR 026 IN13 IN12 IR 027 IN15 IN14 Output IR 030 OUT1 OUTO IR 031 OUT3 OUT2 IR 032 OUTS OUT4 IR 033 OUT7 OUT6 IR 034 OUTS OUTS IR 035 OUT11 OUT10 IR 036 OUT13 OUT12 IR 037 OUT15 OUT14 Note 1 When the maximum number of CompoBus S nodes is set to 16 IN8 to IN15 and OUT8 to OUT15 can be used as work bits 2 CompoBus S Terminals with less than 8 points are allocated bit addresses from either 0 or 8 filling up from the lowest available word 3 CompoBus S Terminals with 16 points can be set for only even number ad dresses 5 3 Communications Status The status of communications with CompoBus S Terminals is indicated with the status flags in AR 04 through AR 07 Bits 0 to 7 contain the Active Slave Flags and bits 8 to 15 contain the Slave Communications Error Flags 112 Communications Status Section 5 3 Uppermost bits Slave Communications Error Flags Lower Bits Active Slave Flags 15 14 13 12 11 10 AR04 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AROS IN7 IN6 INS IN4 IN3 IN
34. LD 0 64 Any LD NOT AND 0 52 AND NOT OR OR NOT AND LD 0 26 OR LD OUT 1 88 OUT NOT SET 2 58 RSET TIM 4 76 Constant for SV 7 8 7 6 2 9 DM for SV 15 6 15 4 2 9 CNT 4 50 Constant for SV 6 8 2 9 3 1 DM for SV 14 5 2 9 3 1 ON execution Conditions Top min bottom max OFF execution time us time us 139 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 Code Mnemonic ON execution Conditions Top min bottom max OFF execution time us time us 10 SFT Reset IL JMP 10 4 With 1 word shift register 9 2 0 98 0 98 15 3 With 10 word shift register 11 9 1 0 1 0 39 6 With 53 word shift register 26 2 1 0 1 0 11 KEEP 3 2 Any Reset IL JMP 3 1 1 2 1 3 12 CNTR Reset IL JMP 10 9 Constant for SV 7 9 5 5 5 6 18 8 DM for SV 13 DIFU 5 5 Any Shift IL JMP 5 1 4 8 0 96 14 DIFD 5 3 Any Shift IL JMP 5 4 4 7 0 97 15 TIMH Reset IL JMP 9 0 Regular execution constant for SV 13 0 12 6 6 1 9 6 Interrupt execution constant for SV 14 4 14 0 7 5 9 8 Regular execution DM for SV 20 8 20 5 6 1 10 7 Interrupt execution DM for SV 22 2 22 0 7 5 16 WSFT 14 0 With 1 word shift register 2 6 18 6 With 10 word shift register 1 15 ms With 2 048 word shift register u
35. PC Setup settings cyclic operation D data modifying Programming Console data link decimal data with sign See signed decimal data decimal data without sign See unsigned decimal data 237 Index DeviceNet communications examples flags LED indicators status information dielectric strength differentiated instructions entering dimensions DIN Track installation displays converting between hex and ASCII Programming Console cycle time Programming Console downloading programs duct installation E EC Directives precautions EEPROM mounting removing specifications electrical noise preventing ERR ALM indicator flashing lit error log PC Setup settings errors fatal identifying non fatal programming Programming Console operations reading clearing messages Programming Console user defined errors Expansion I O Units available models components connections dimensions general specifications input specifications output specifications expansion instructions reading and changing function code assignments Expansion Memory Unit connections Expansion Units available models connections specifications explicit message communications 238 F FAL numbers FAL 06 FALS numbers FALS 07 false inputs fatal errors troubleshooting features flags CompoBus S DeviceNet SR area flags flash memory p
36. Set value 0 5 to 319 968 ms One shot interrupt Precision 0 1 ms High speed counters High speed counter No interrupt 1 input see note 1 Count check interrupt Differential phase mode 5 kHz Pulse plus direction input mode 20 kHz An interrupt can be generated when the Up down input mode 20 kHz count equals the set value or the count lies Increment mode 20 kHz within a preset range Interrupt inputs counter mode No interrupt 2 inputs Incrementing counter 2 kHz Count up interrupt Decrementing counter 2 kHz Pulse outputs e 2 outputs Single phase pulse output without acceleration deceleration See note 2 10 Hz to 10 kHz e 2 outputs Variable duty ratio pulse output See note 2 0 1 to 999 9 Hz duty ratio 0 to 100 e 1 output Pulse output with trapezoidal acceleration deceleration See note 2 Pulse plus direction output up down pulse output 10 Hz to 10 kHz System Configurations Section 1 2 Main function Variations Details Synchronized pulse control 1 point see notes 1 and 2 Input frequency range 10 to 500 Hz 20 Hz to 1 kHz or 300 Hz to 20 kHz Output frequency range 10 Hz to 10 kHz Quick response input 2 inputs in CPU Units with 10 I O points 4 inputs in CPU Units with 20 I O points Minimum input signal width 50 us Input time constant Determines the input time constant for all inputs Settings 1 2 3 5 10 20 40 or 80 ms Ca
37. area DM 2022 to DM 2047 DM 2048 to DM 6143 cannot be used Read only DM 6144 to DM 6599 DM 6144 to DM 6568 Error Log DM 2000 to DM 2021 DM 6569 to DM 6599 PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 DM 6600 to DM 6655 Since the PC model is set to CQM1 a program that will run properly in the CQM1 will pass the program check even if it won t run properly in the CPM2C S Monitoring Online An error message will be displayed and the values will not be accepted if a data Editing and Set Values area address that exceeds the range of a CPM2C S data area is entered for monitoring time charts an instruction operand or a timer counter SV Transferring and DM Area addresses not supported by the CPM2C S cannot be transferred or Verifying DM Area Data monitored DM 1024 to DM 6143 are not checked for DM Area verification Available Program Since the program capacity of the CQM1 7 200 words is greater than that of the Memory CPM2C S 4 096 words the display will show more free space than is actually available Be sure to keep the actual program capacity in mind while program ming Program Transfer When the program is transferred from the PC to the SSS with the default function code assignments FUN18 FUN19 FUN87 and FUN88 will be displayed as TKY MCMP DSW and 7SEG The instructions however will be transferred correctly 22 will be displayed if any instructions not supported by the SSS are trans ferred from the CPM2C S Mnemonic
38. for both the write and read areas 2 Data written through DeviceNet is valid even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so outputs may go ON when the PC is in PROGRAM mode if output bits are allocated to the DeviceNet I O Link Write area To prevent outputs from going ON while the PC is in PROGRAM mode do not allocate output bits directly to the DeviceNet I O Link Write area 3 If words in any areas other than the IR area IR 000 to IR 227 or LR area LR 00 to LR 15 are allocated to the I O Link Read area the data may not be cleared even when the power is interrupted possibly causing data from immediately before power interruption to be read by the master If this creates a potential problem use the following measures to eliminate the problem e When starting in RUN or MONITOR mode configure the ladder program so that the Read area is rewritten with appropriate data e When starting in PROGRAM mode it will not be possible to take direct measures at the slave Monitor the status at the master and do not read the data when the operating mode is PROGRAM mode When a fatal error occurs at a slave the master may read data from immedi ately before the error In this case also monitor the status at the master and do not read the data Allocating Read Write An OMRON DeviceNet Configurator version 2 0 or higher can be used to spec Areas with the DeviceNet ify the DeviceNet Read and Write areas Contact your OMRON representative if Configura
39. measures must be provided in external control circuits e Construct a control circuit so that power supply for the I O circuits does not come ON before power supply for the Unit If power supply for the I O circuits comes ON before power supply for the Unit normal operation may be tempo rarily interrupted e f the operating mode is changed from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode with the IOM Hold Bit ON the output will hold the most recent status In such a case ensure that the external load does not exceed specifications If operation is stopped because of an operation error including FALS instruc tions the values in the internal memory of the CPU Unit will be saved but the outputs will all turn OFF e Install the CPM2C S and Expansion I O Units properly so that they will not fall off e Be sure that the terminal blocks and other items with locking devices are prop erly locked into place Improper locking may result in malfunction Application Precautions 5 e Be sure that terminal blocks and connectors are connected in the specified di rection with the correct polarity Not doing so may result in malfunction e Use the Unit with the battery housing cover in place to prevent dust or foreign matter from entering inside the Unit Not doing so may result in malfunction e Install the expansion I O connector cover to the last Unit Expansion Unit or Expansion I O Unit to prevent dust or foreign matter from entering inside
40. modifying Programming Console bit status force set reset Programming Console bits searching Programming Console buzzer operation Programming Console C cabinet installation precautions Programming Console installation cables available models characteristics check levels program checks checking program syntax Programming Console circuit configuration inputs outputs transistor clearing memory areas Programming Console clock reading and setting the clock communications capabilities overview Communications Errors Index communications mode CompoBus S communications mode communications speed DeviceNet Communications communications status CompoBus S CompoBus S communications communications mode communications status compatible Slaves flags T O allocation CompoBus S Communications Error CompoBus S I O Link Unit See also Expansion Units available models CompoBus S Master functions components Adapter Units CPU Units Expansion I O Units Power Supply Unit conduit installation connectors available models counters changing SV Programming Console example of inputting CPM2C function comparison CPU Units available models components cyclic operation dimensions general specifications input specifications internal structure cycle monitor time PC Setup settings cycle time displaying Programming Console cycle time minimum
41. 000 eee Bits 00 to 07 Bits 00 to 07 Bits 00 to 07 Node address Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3 duplication 1 Node 0 INO Node 2 IN2 Node 0 INO 00000 Slave 1 input If the addresses for Slave 1 and Slave 3 20000 are the same the Master will not be able to read input from Slave 3 If a communications error is generated 00100 Slave 2 input the status of IR 00100 will be the same as before the error and so the change in the status of the actual input will not be detected 113 Communications Status Section 5 3 e Example of Countermeasure in Ladder Program ARO500 AR0508 INO s Active Flag INO s Error Flag 02800 Slave 1 communications normal 02800 e AR0502 AR0510 IN2 s Active Flag IN2 s Error Flag 02900 Slave 2 communications normal 02900 e 114 SECTION 6 Exchanging Data with a DeviceNet Master This section explains how to exchange data with a CPM2C S100C DRT or CPM2C S110C DRT DeviceNet Master Refer to this section when using remote I O communications or explicit message communications from a DeviceNet Master 6 1 Initial Settings 04 4 aks Fae ea ee Rha Fe ee he we ee as ae eet Wee SR 6 1 1 Setting the Node Number 0 0 0 eee eee eee 6 1 2 Setting the Communications Speed 0 0 00 eee eee eee 6 1 3 Attaching Status Information 0 6 2 Remote I O Communications 0 0 cece eae 6 3 Explicit Message Communications
42. 010 to IR 029 When the READ BYTE DATA command is executed from an OMRON Master the bytes are stored in the same order HH LL in which they were stored in the Slave C200HX HG HE PCs Writing Data with IOWR This example shows the instruction operands and results when 20 words of data are written from a Master mounted in a C200HX HG HE PC to words IR 010 to IRO29 in a Slave Refer to the DeviceNet CompoBus D Masters Operation Manual for details on explicit messages and refer to the C200HX HG HE Programmable Controllers Operation Manual for details on IOWR Example Network Master s node number 63 Conditions Slave s network address 0 Slave s node number 2 IOWR Operand Details IOWR Cc S D 1 e Control Code Contents Function Hex Master s node number 3F Hex specifies 63 Master s unit address FE Hex specifies the local Unit e e Command Words Source Information Contents Function Hex Specifies starting response word DM 2000 82 Hex specifies the DM area 07D0 Hex specifies address 2000 Refer to the C200HX HG HE Operation Manual for details Response monitoring time 64 Hex specifies 10 0 seconds Number of bytes of command data beginning with word S 4 32 Hex specifies 50 bytes EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code 2801 Hex Slave node number 02 Hex WRITE BYTE DATA command service code 1E Hex Class ID 002F Hex
43. 1 Leading word 2 N Each stored in J 2 digits BCD Error log record 7 3 words used Error classification 00 Non fatal 80 Fatal Note 1 2 3 An error record with an error code of 00 will be stored in the error log for power interruptions Refer to 9 2 Self diagnostic Functions for tables listing the error codes Error Log Storage Methods The error log storage method is set in the PC Setup bits 00 to 03 of DM 6655 Set any of the following methods 1 Set 0 in bits 00 to 03 of DM 6655 This is the default setting This method stores the most recent 7 error log records and discards older records This is achieved by shifting the records as shown below so that the oldest record record 0 is lost whenever a new record is generated Lost 4 Error log record 1 W Error log record 2 Ma N All records shifted N Error log record 6 Error log record 7 New record added Set 1 in bits 00 to 03 of DM 6655 This method stores only the first 7 error log records and ignores any subse quent errors beyond those 7 Set another value other than 0 or 1 in bits 00 to 03 of DM 6655 A setting other than 0 or 1 disables the log so that no records are stored Clearing the Error Log To clear the entire error log turn ON SR 25214 from a Programming Device Af ter the error log has been cleared SR 25214 will turn OFF again automatically 107
44. 1 2 A common CPM2C S110C and CPM2C S110C DRT Sourcing Transistor Outputs I O connector 24 VDC rdbt oa COM S o o olan a lo m gt ie s olo olalsjo y o 24 VDC Don t exceed the output capacity or the maximum common current for transistor outputs shown in the following table eee a cee il Specification Output capacity 300 mA at 24 VDC Maximum common current capacity 1 2 A common 66 Section 3 4 Wiring and Connections Wiring the CPM2C S to Wire the inputs as shown in the following diagram when using an Input Terminal an Input Terminal Use an XW2B 20G4 or XW2B 20G5 Terminal Block and an XW2Z A Connecting Cable Sourcing Sinking 67 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Input Devices The following table shows how to connect various input devices Device Circuit diagram Relay output 4 PM2C 5 mA 6 mA 8 mA CPM2C S COM NPN open collector in C Sensor IN CPM2C S O KC 5 mA 6 mA 8 mA O OV NPN current output Use the same power supply for the input and sensor Constant current circuit IN CPM2C S PNP current output 8 supply aa 5 mA 6 mA 8 mA om o CPM2C S Voltage output Note Do not use the following wiring with voltage output devices 68 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 High speed Counter Inputs Using IR 00000 to IR 00002 as High s
45. 2 Press the FUN and then the MONTR Key to begin the operation If there are no messages the following display will appear If there are messages the most serious message will be displayed when the MONTR Key is pressed Pressing MONTR again will clear the present mes sage and display the next most serious error message Continue pressing MONTR until all messages have been cleared These are some examples of error messages A memory error lt O Z g y A system error MONTR A message displayed with MSG 46 MONTR All messages cleared MONTR 8 4 4 Buzzer Operation 174 This operation is used to turn on and off the buzzer that sounds when Program ming Console keys are pressed This buzzer will also sound whenever an error occurs during PC operation Buzzer operation for errors is not affected by this setting This operation is possible in any mode Run MONITOR PROGRAM Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 Key Sequence 1 2 3 Follow the procedure below to turn the key input buzzer on and off 1 Press the CLR SHIFT and then the CLR Key to bring up the mode display In this case the PC is in PROGRAM mode and the buzzer is ON Jere 2 Press the SHIFT and then the 1 Key to turn off the buzzer cl i The buzzer will not sound 3 Press the SHIFT and then the 1 Key again to turn the buzzer back ON when BZ
46. 232C Port Connection A personal computer can be connected to the CPU Unit s RS 232C port with an XW2Z L100S or XW2Z LJ00S V Connecting Cable The XW2Z Lj00S Cables have a D sub 25 pin connector and the XW2Z _ 00S V Cables have a D sub 9 pin connector Connecting Cable XW2Z 200S V 2 m i CPM2C CN111 0 15 m U CS1W CN118 0 1 m RS 232C port D sub 9 pin CPM2C CIF01 CPM2C CIF11 A personal computer can be connected to the CPU Unit s communications port through a CQM1 CIF02 RS 232C Adapter The CQM1 CIF02 RS 232C Peripheral port rm IBM EC AT or XW2Z 5008 V 5 m compatible computer aa jo anma Peripheral Port Connection Adapter has a 9 pin connector IBM PC AT or compatible computer CQM1 CIF02 3 3 m 76 Dy a it gt CPM2C CN111 0 15 m CS1W CN114 0 05 m CPM2C CIF01 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Note 1 The CS1W CN226 626 Connecting Cables can be used but the CS1W CN225 625 and CS1W CN227 627 Connecting Cables cannot be used 2 The CQM1 CIF11 Connecting Cable cannot be used If one is connected the CPM2C S will not recognize it the PC will enter RUN mode at startup if pin 4 of the DIP switch is ON and the PC Setup DM 6600 is set so that the Programming Console s mode switch controls the startup mode 3 Refer to Section 8 Using Programming Devices for details on the Support Software that can be used with t
47. 5 CPM2C CIF11 RS 422 RS 232C Adapter Unit 0000 0 31 Unit Components Section 2 2 2 1 Specifications 2 1 1 General Specifications Supply voltage 24 VDC Operating voltage range 20 4 to 26 4 VDC Power consumption 3 W See note Inrush current 25 A max Insulation resistance 20 MQ min at 500 VDC between insulated circuits Dielectric strength 2 300 VAC for 1 min between insulated circuits Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000 4 4 2 kV power lines Vibration resistance 10 to 57 Hz 0 075 mm double amplitude 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m s in X Y and Z directions for 80 minutes each Time coefficient 8 minutes x coefficient factor 10 total time 80 minutes Shock resistance 147 m s2 three times each in X Y and Z directions Ambient temperature Operating 0 to 55 C Storage 20 to 75 C except for the battery Humidity 10 to 90 with no condensation Atmosphere Must be free from corrosive gas Power interrupt time 2 ms min Note The above figure for power consumption includes the power consumption of the Programmable Console and Adapter Unit CIFLJL 2 1 2 Characteristics Item Specifications Control method Stored program method I O control method Cyclic scan with direct output Immediate refreshing can be performed with IORF 97 Programming
48. 6 Function Day of the Week 00 to 06 BCD 00 Sunday 01 Monday 02 Tuesday 03 Wednesday 04 Thursday 05 Friday 06 Saturday 08 to 12 Not used 13 30 second Compensation Bit Turn this bit ON to round off to the nearest minute When the seconds are 00 to 29 the seconds are cleared to 00 and the rest of the time setting is left unchanged When the seconds are 30 to 59 the seconds are cleared to 00 and the time is incremented by one minute Clock Stop Bit Turn this bit ON to stop the clock The time date can be overwritten while this bit is ON Clock Set Bit To change the time date turn ON AR 2114 write the new time date being sure to leave AR 2114 ON and then turn this bit ON to enable a new time date setting The clock will restart and both AR 2114 and AR 2115 will be turned OFF automatically 00 to 15 Not used 00 to 15 Power off Counter 4 digits BCD This is the count of the number of times that the power has been turned off To clear the count write 0000 from a Programming Device Note 1 The same data can be read immediately with PRV 62 2 The time and date can be set while AR 2114 is ON The new setting be comes effective when AR 2115 is turned ON AR 2114 and AR 2115 are turned OFF automatically when the new setting goes into effect 3 The units for the maximum and current cycle times are determined by the setting in bits 08 to 15 of DM 6618 A setting of 00
49. 6655 Automatically turns OFF again when reset is complete Only effective if the PC is in PROGRAM mode 11 Forced Status Hold Bit See note OFF The forced status of bits that are forced set reset is cleared when switching be tween PROGRAM mode and MONITOR mode ON The status of bits that are forced set reset are maintained when switching be tween PROGRAM mode and MONITOR mode The PC Setup can be set to maintain the status of this bit when the PC is turned off 12 1 0 Hold Bit See note OFF 1IR and LR bits are reset when starting or stopping operation ON IR and LR bit status is maintained when starting or stopping operation The PC Setup can be set to maintain the status of this bit when the PC is turned off 13 Not used 14 Error Log Reset Bit Read Turn ON to clear error log Automatically turns OFF again when operation is complete write 15 Not used 90 Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 Word s Bit s Function Read write SR 253 00 to 07 FAL Error Code Read The error code a 2 digit number is stored here when an error occurs The FAL num only ber is stored here when FAL 06 or FALS 07 is executed This word is reset to 00 by executing a FAL 00 instruction or by clearing the error from a Programming Device 08 Battery Error Flag Turns ON when the CPU Unit backup battery s voltage is too low 09
50. 8 input points Expansion I O Unit 24 I O points Expansion I O Unit 16 output points 6 inputs IR 00000 to IR 00005 8 inputs IR 00100 to IR 00107 16 inputs IR 00200 to IR 00215 0 inputs 4 outputs IR 01000 to IR 01003 0 outputs 8 outputs IR 01100 to IR 01107 16 outputs IR 01200 to IR 01215 Note Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual W356 for more examples showing the bits allocated to Expansion I O Units 4 3 I O Allocation to CompoBus S Slaves The CompoBus S input area IR 020 to IR 027 and CompoBus S output area IR 030 to IR 037 are allocated for the CompoBus S Terminal s I O The follow 88 Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 ing table shows the I O allocation of the CompoBus S Terminal INO to IN15 and OUTO to OUT15 Bit address IR word Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 1098 7 65432 1 0 Output area Note 1 INO to IN15 are node numbers of Input Terminals and OUTO to OUT15 are node numbers of Output Terminals 2 When the maximum number of CompoBus S nodes is set to 16 IN8 to IN15 and OUT8 to OUT15 can be used as work bits 3 CompoBus S Terminals with 8 points or less are allocated I O bits in byte units beginning from bit 00 or bit 08 4 Only even addresses can be specified for 16 point CompoBus S Terminals 4 4 SR
51. 8EDM 16 input points 16 inputs 24 VDC CPM2C 16EDM 8 output points 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 8ETM 8 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 8ET1M 16 output points 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 16ETM 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 16ET1M Expansion Units CPM2C MAD11 CPM2C TS001 101 CPM2C SRT21 Analog I O Unit Temperature Sensor Unit CompoBus S I O Link Unit Unit Max number Inputs Outputs Model of Units Analog I O Unit 2 analog inputs 4 2 points 2 words 1 point 1 word CPM2C MAD11 1 analog output allocated allocated Temperature 2 thermocouple 4 2 points 2 words CPM2C TS001 Sensor Unit inputs allocated 2 platinum 2 points 2 words CPM2C TS101 resistance allocated thermometer inputs CompoBus S I O 8 input points and 5 8 points 1 word 8 points 1 word CPM2C SRT21 Link Unit 8 output points for allocated allocated the built in outputs Inputs from the Outputs to the and inputs of the Master Master Master Unit 13 System Configurations Section 1 2 1 2 4 DeviceNet Interface A CPM2C S100C DRT or CPM2C S110C DRT can be used as a DeviceNet Slaves to create an I O Link of up to 1 024 points 512 inputs and 512 outputs with the DeviceNet Master The input and output areas used in the I O Link can be allocated independently and the data areas starting addresses and size of these Read Write areas can be specified fre
52. Area These bits mainly serve as flags related to CPM2C S operation or contain present and set values for various func tions The functions of the SR area are explained in the following table Note Read only words and bits can be read as status in controller PC operation but they cannot be written from the ladder program Bits and words that are Not used are also read only Word s Bit s Function 00 to 15 Pulse Output PV 0 Contains the pulse output PV 16 777 215 to 16 777 215 SR 22915 acts as the sign bit a negative number is indicated when SR 22915 is ON The same PV data can be read immediately with PRV 62 Only Pulse Output PV 0 is used for ACC 00 to 15 Pulse Output PV 1 Contains the pulse output PV 16 777 215 to 16 777 215 SR 23115 acts as the sign bit a negative number is indicated when SR 23115 is ON The same PV data can be read immediately with PRV 62 89 PC Setup Section 4 6 Word s Bit s Function Read write SR 232 00 to 15 Macro Function Input Area Read to Contains the input operands for MCRO 99 write SR 235 Can be used as work bits when MCRO 99 is not used SR 236 00 to 15 Macro Function Output Area to Contains the output operands for MCRO 99 SR 239 Can be used as work bits when MCRO 99 is not used SR 240 00 to 15 Interrupt Input 00003 Counter Mode SV SV when interr
53. Bracket DIN43700 standards HF Two screws i E 18675 Panel thickness 1 0 to 3 2 mm le 92 Allow at least 80 mm for the cable connector above the Programming Console be used CNNSI SSS SSS About 70 mm is required 8 3 2 Compatible Programming Consoles There are 3 Programming Consoles that can be used with the CPM2C S The CQM1H PRO01 E CQM1 PRO01 E and the C200H PRO27 E The key func tions for these Programming Consoles are identical Press and hold the Shift Key to input a letter shown in the upper left corner of the key or the upper function of a key that has two functions For example the CQM1 PRO01 E s AR HR Key can specify either the AR or HR Area press and release the Shift Key and then press the AR HR Key to specify the AR Area 167 Using a Programming Console Section 8 3 CQM1H PROO1 E The CQM1H PROO1 E can be connected directly to the CPM2C S CQM1 PRO01 E _CD display Vode switch Operation keys Attached Cable 2 m C200H PRO27 E LCD display Mode switch Operation keys Cassette recorded jack Cannot be used with the CPM2C S The following Connecting Cables can be used with the C200H PRO27 E Cable length Connection C200H CN222 Connects to the peripheral port on a CS1W CN224 Connects directly to the CPM2C S CPU Unit s CS1W CN624 communications port Different Keys The following keys are labeled diff
54. C1000H CxxH 200H UM transfer a a T a a a Program Input and CQM1 data areas are larger than the corresponding CPM2C S data areas so Program Check the data area addresses that don t actually exist in the CPM2C S or instructions not supported by the CPM2C S can be input and won t be detected in the pro gram check Be sure that the word and bit addresses are within the specified ranges and that all instructions are supported 163 SYSMAC Support Software SSS Section 8 2 If a program contains a data area address that exceeds the range of a CPM2C S data area a memory error will be generated when the program is executed and the Memory Area Specification Error Flag AR 1308 will be turned ON Data area CPM2C S range CQM1 range Input words IR 000 to IR 009 IR 000 to IR 011 Output words IR 010 to IR 019 IR 100 to IR 111 Work words and IR 020 to IR 049 IR 200 to IR 227 IR 012 to IR 099 CompoBus S I O IR 050 to IR 199 cannot be used IR 112 to IR 227 areas SR area SR 228 to SR 255 SR 228 to SR 255 HR area HR 00 to HR 19 HR 00 to HR 99 HR 20 to HR 99 cannot be used AR area AR 00 to AR 23 AR 00 to AR 27 AR 24 to AR 27 cannot be used LR area LR 00 to LR 15 LR 00 to LR 63 LR 16 to LR 63 cannot be used Timer Counter TIM CNT 000 to 255 TIM CNT 000 to 511 area TIM CNT 256 to 511 cannot be used DM Read write DM 0000 to DM 1999 DM 0000 to DM 6143
55. CompoBus S Slaves 0 0 cee eee eee ARQ SRATI uc Fe eae NARA eee Ee a ek eae ae oe eee ee tee 4 AS ARAT vie 8 bbe atte cited lace teint a tga d dtd aed r 8 a e er 4 6 PC Setup 23hidreaetiedinig oie ewes ate is cota re hay sha ie Sata gale 4 7 Basic PC Operation and I O Processes 0 0 0c eee eee 428 CEMO LOSS 05 cheat Oa is eee RASS A Sys e NA E RAGS eRe E habe es SECTION 5 Exchanging Data with CompoBus S Slaves 5 1 Initial Settings o teete Gea Se BES SENOS See Eee 5 2 Remote I O Communications is sss 0 0 00 ccc cece eee e eee ees 5 3 Communications Status seese eseese ccc cece cece eee e eee eees SECTION 6 Exchanging Data with a DeviceNet Master 6 1 Initial Settings sy 4 45045 shit a CHa eC AL be ees 6 2 Remote I O Communications 0 0 ec cee e een eens 6 3 Explicit Message Communications 0 0 eee 64 Status Information es 5 cscc es ow ak ae eek aR AAA a ees vii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 7 Cycle Time and I O Response Time fed s y cle Tames soo Batira tet ay Sanit aaah oe hes ua sted Bae ek aah rg ok te role ear aN ic 722 VO Response TNS isi ss eek Pia k ei Ni tet ete abe sia h eae Pe eet 3d 7 3 Interrupt Processing Time 0 0c eee eee ee 7 4 One to one PC Link I O Response Time 0 0 0 0 0c SECTION 8 Using Programming Devices eeeeeeeee 8 1 SYSMAC CPT Support Software 0
56. Contents Function Hex Specifies starting response word DM 2000 82 Hex specifies the DM area 07D0 Hex specifies address 2000 Refer to the C200HX HG HE Operation Manual for details Response monitoring time 64 Hex specifies 10 0 seconds Number of bytes of command data beginning with word S 4 OB Hex specifies 11 bytes EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code 2801 Hex Slave node number 02 Hex READ BYTE DATA command service code 1C Hex Class ID 002F Hex Instance ID 0001 Hex specifies data area Starting read address 000A Hex specifies IR 010 Address L 0A Hex Address H 00 Hex Number of bytes 28 Hex specifies 40 bytes The rightmost byte of S 5 is not used e Destination Information Contents gt Hex 00 10 Master Unit s unit number 00 Number of words of command data beginning with word S 10 BCD specifies 10 words e Response Words The results are stored as follows Contents Function Hex EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code 2801 Hex Normal completion code 0000 Hex Number of bytes received 2A Hex indicates 42 bytes This is the number of bytes from D 3 to the end 129 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 Word Contents Function Hex Slave s node number 02 Hex READ BYTE DATA response service code 9C Hex These words contain the data read from slave words IR
57. EMI Electromagnetic Interference EN50081 2 Radiated emission 10 m regulations Low Voltage Directive Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1 000 VAC and 75 to 1 500 VDC meet the required safety standards for the PC EN61131 2 6 3 Conformance to EC Directives The CPM2C S PCs comply with EC Directives To ensure that the machine or device in which the CPM2C S PC is used complies with EC Directives the PC must be installed as follows 1 2 3 1 The CPM2C S PC must be installed within a control panel 2 Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power supplies used for the communications and I O power supplies 3 CPM2C S PCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common Emission Standard EN50081 2 Radiated emission characteristics 10 m regulations may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel used other devices connected to the control panel wiring and other condi tions You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives xvi SECTION 1 Introduction This section describes the special features and functions of the CPM2C S shows the possible system configurations and outlines the steps required before operation Read this section first when using the CPM2C S for the first time Refer to the CPMI CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 Programming Manual W353 for details on programming opera tions 1 1 CPM2C
58. Expansion Memory Unit CPM2C CN111 a CS1W CN114 EEPROM Indicator UPLOAD DM Button UPLOAD Button CPM2C CIF01 System Configurations Section 1 2 Complete Communications Capabilities Host Link A Host Link connection can be made through the PC s communications port used as a RS 232C or peripheral port A personal computer or Programmable Terminal connected in Host Link mode can be used for operations such as read ing writing data in the PC s I O memory or reading changing the PC s operating mode 1 1 Host Link Communications 1 N Host Link Communications J a N N B 2 Cc G 2 8 D 2 oc jam Up to 32 PCs can be connected No protocol The TXD 48 and RXD 47 instructions can be used in no protocol mode to ex Communications change data with standard serial devices For example data can be received from a bar code reader or transmitted to a serial printer The serial devices can be connected to the communications port as a RS 232C or peripheral port Inputting data from Outputting data to a bar code reader a serial printer Bar code Serial reader printer High speed 1 1 NT Link Ina 1 1 NT Link an OMRON Programmable Terminal PT can be connected Communications directly to the CPM2C S The PT must be connected to the communications port as an RS 232C port not as a peripheral port OMRON PT h One to one PC Link A CPM2C S can be linked directly to another CPM2C S CQM1 CPM
59. LR area LR 00 to LR 15 05 Hex HR area HR 00 to HR 19 06 Hex AR area AR 00 to AR 23 read area only 07 Hex Timer Counter area TC 000 to TC 255 Address L and Address H command Specify the starting word address of the read data in hexadecimal as follows Address L The rightmost two digits of the 4 digit starting address Address H The leftmost two digits of the 4 digit starting address Number of bytes command Specify the number of bytes of data to read in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal The allowed range is 01 to C8 Hex which is equivalent to 1 to 200 decimal Number of bytes received response Indicates the number of bytes of data in hexadecimal from the source node number on Source node number response Indicates the node number in hexadecimal of the CPM2C S that returned the response Read data response Contains the desired data read from the specified data area Word data is re turned with the leftmost byte bits 8 to 15 preceding the rightmost byte bits 0 to 7 lf an odd number was specified in the command s number of bytes parame ter the last byte of read data will contain the leftmost byte of a word Precautions The range of data specified by the data area instance ID starting address Ad 121 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 dress L and Address H and number of bytes parameters must not exceed the range of the CPM2C S data area WRITE BYTE DA
60. Master Unit The status attachment is set in DM 6605 of the PC Setup as shown in the follow ing table The initial setting is 0 attach status information change this setting to 1 to disable attachment of status information Refer to 6 4 Status Information for details on the status information DM 6605 04 to 07 Sets whether CPM2C S status is transmitted to 0 the DeviceNet Master Attach 0 Hex Attach status ahead of data status 1 Hex Do not attach status ahead of data 6 2 Remote I O Communications Allocating Read Write Areas with the PC Setup 116 Allocate the DeviceNet read and write areas to specify what part of the PC s data area will be used to read and write data from the DeviceNet Master Unit Specify the PC data area starting word address and number of bytes Up to 64 bytes can be allocated for DeviceNet remote I O Switch the CPM2C S to PROGRAM mode and use a Programming Device such as a Programming Console or Support Software to make the following set tings in DM 6605 to DM 6609 of the PC Setup The settings in these words are read only when the CPM2C S is turned ON so the PC s power must be turned OFF and then ON again to make changes effective Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 Word Bits Function Default 00 to 03 DeviceNet Read Write area setting 0 Hex Read IN IR 020 to IR 027 Write OUT IR 030 to IR 037 1 Hex Use settings in DM 6606 to DM 6609 04 to 07 Tr
61. Non fatal Errors 05 2 06s de oh Sa es ae as SEN eee ees 972 4 Fatal Errors nast stares eienn d annn ee Soule thea s MS been e E NA o 9 3 Programming Console Operation Errors 0 0 0 ee eee 9 4 Programming Errors ss sci eee gw ES Ve eR SEW es a toe Sas 9 5 Troubleshooting Flowcharts 0 0 0 eee cece eee 9 6 Maintenance Inspections 0 0 eee eee e eens 9 7 Battery Replacement sion cas ee te betes he Sh Re Sa Se Re ae Hee 203 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure Section 9 1 9 1 9 1 1 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure Initial System Checks Check the following items after setting up and wiring the CPM2C S but before performing a test run Item Points to check Power supply and Is the wiring correct I O connections Are the terminals securely tightened Are there any shorts between crimp terminals or wires Refer to 3 4 Wiring and Connections for details Connecting cables Are the cables all connected correctly and locked Refer to 3 4 Wiring and Connections for details Protective label Has the protective label been removed Note 1 Always clear memory before beginning to program the CPM2C S Although memory is cleared before the CPU Unit is shipped the contents of the DM HR AR and counter areas may change in transit See 8 4 2 Clearing Memory for details on the All Clear operation 2 See 1 3 3 Operating Mode at Startup to determine what mode th
62. O Expansion I O Units Analog I O Unit Temperature Sensor Unit Unit Temperature Sensor Unit and CompoBus S I O Link Unit and CompoBus S I O Link Unit O memory Input bits IR 00000 to IR 00915 IR 00000 to IR 00915 Output bits IR 01000 to IR 01915 IR 01000 to IR 01915 25 Comparison with the CPM2C Section 1 5 I O memory Work bits 672 bits IR 02800 to IR 02915 IR 03800 to IR 04915 IR 20000 to IR 22715 928 bits IR 02000 to IR 04915 IR 20000 to IR 22715 SR Special Relay area 448 bits SR 22800 to SR 25515 448 bits SR 22800 to SR 25515 TR Temporary Relay area 8 bits TRO to TR7 8 bits TRO to TR7 HR Holding Relay area 320 bits 320 bits HR 0000 to HR 1915 HR 0000 to HR 1915 AR Auxiliary Relay area 384 bits 384 bits AR 0000 to AR 2315 AR 0000 to AR 2315 LR Link Relay area 256 bits 256 bits LR 0000 to LR 1515 LR 0000 to LR 1515 Timer Counter area 256 bits 256 bits TIM CNT 000 to TIM CNT 255 TIM CNT 000 to TIM CNT 255 DM Data Read write 2 048 words 2 048 words Memory area area DM 0000 to DM 2047 DM 0000 to DM 2047 Read only 456 words 456 words area DM 6144 to DM 6599 DM 6144 to DM 6599 PC Setup 56 words 56 words DM 6600 to DM 6655 DM 6600 to DM 6655 Memory backup Program area read only DM area including PC Setup Flash memory backup Flash memory backup Read write DM area HR area AR area and counters
63. One for input from a thermo couple sensor and one for input from a platinum resistance thermometer sensor There are 2 input points on each Temperature Sensor Unit e Thermocouple inputs and measurement ranges K 200 to 1 300 C K 0 0 to 500 0 C J 100 to 850 C and J 0 0 to 400 0 C e Platinum resistance thermometer inputs and measurement ranges Pt100 200 0 to 650 0 C JPt100 200 0 to 650 0 C The interval timer can be set between 0 5 and 319 968 ms and can be set to gen erate just one interrupt one shot mode or periodic interrupts scheduled inter rupt mode The clock accuracy within 1 minute month can be read from the program to show the current year month day day of the week and time The clock can be set from a Programming Device such as a Programming Console or the time can be adjusted by rounding up or down to the nearest minute TIML is a long term timer that accommodates set values up to 99 990 sec onds 27 hours 46 minutes 30 seconds When combined with the SECONDS TO HOURS conversion instruction HMS the long term timer provides an easy way to control equipment scheduling System Configurations Section 1 2 Expansion Memory Unit The CPM1 EMU01 V1 Expansion Memory Unit is a program loader for small size or micro PCs Using the CPM1 EMU01 V1 simple on site transfer of user programs and data memory DM 6144 to DM 6655 is possible with PCs A CPM2C S
64. PRO GRAM Mode correct the cause of the error and then clear the error MSG 46 is used to display a message on a Programming Device connected to the CPM2C S The message which can be up to 16 characters long is dis played when the instruction s execution condition is ON Self diagnostic Functions Section 9 2 9 2 3 Non fatal Errors Message FAL No PC operation and program execution will continue after one or more of these errors have occurred Although PC operation will continue the cause of the error should be corrected and the error cleared as soon as possible When one of these errors occurs the POWER and RUN indicators will remain lit and the ERR ALM indicator will flash Meaning and appropriate response SYS FAIL FAL 01 to 99 An FAL 06 instruction has been executed in the program Check the FAL number to is 01 to 99 or 9B determine conditions that would cause execution correct the cause and clear the error 9B An error has been detected in the PC Setup Check flags AR 1300 to AR 1302 and correct as directed AR 1300 ON An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6614 when power was turned ON Correct the settings in PROGRAM Mode and turn ON the power again AR 1301 ON An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup DM 6615 to DM 6644 when switching to RUN or MONITOR mode Correct the settings in PROGRAM Mode and switch to RUN or MONITOR mode again AR 1302
65. Pin 4 ON CPM2C Pin 1 ON see note Pin 2 ON CQM1H Pin 5 ON see note Pin 7 ON If pin 3 on the CPM2C S pin 1 on the CPM2C or pin 5 on the CQM1H is OFF connection is still possible if the peripheral port settings in the PC Setup DM 6650 to DM 6654 are set to the standard communications settings When connecting to the CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CQM1 or SRM1 V2 insert the connector into the peripheral port making sure that the connector is oriented correctly e Insert the connector until it securely locks into place e Connections are not possible to the RS 232C port or any other port The peripheral port must be set to the default communications settings shown below Start bits 1 Data bits 7 Stop bits 2 Parity Even Baud rate 9 600 bps Press the levers on the top and bottom of the connector inwards to unlock the connector and pull out as shown in the following diagram j Note Do not attempt to remove the connector by pulling the cable 225 Handling Section 10 3 10 3 3 Uploading Programs Ladder programs and the contents of data memory can be uploaded to the EEPROM using the following procedure The buttons used will determine whether the contents of data memory are uploaded or not Expansion Memory Unit EEPROM F CS1W CN114 Indicator UPLOAD DM Button UPLOAD Button CPM2C CIF01 Button UPLOAD DM UPLOAD Ladder program and Read from PC to Read from PC to expansion instructions
66. S PCs 5 Inputting the Flicker Output 199 Programming Example Section 8 5 8 5 4 Checking the Program Check the program syntax in PROGRAM mode to make sure that the program has been input correctly 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display CLR 2 Press the SRCH Key An input prompt will appear requesting the desired check level 3 Input the desired check level 0 1 or 2 The program check will begin when the check level is input and the first error found will be displayed If no errors are found the following display will appear A Note Refer to 9 4 Programming Errors for details on check levels and the programming errors that may be displayed during a program check 4 Press the SRCH Key to continue the search The next error will be dis played Continue pressing the SRCH Key to continue the search The search will continue until an END 01 instruction or the end of Program Memory is reached If errors are displayed edit the program to correct the errors and check the pro gram again Continue checking the program until all errors have been corrected 8 5 5 Test Run in MONITOR Mode Switch the CPM2C S in MONITOR mode and check the operation of the pro gram 1 2 3 1 Set the
67. Sampling word to word 58 7 Sampling DMto DM PWM 30 3 Constant for pulse width ratio 2 6 43 4 Word for pulse width ratio 46 0 DM for pulse width ratio SCL2 35 1 Parameter word designation word to word 2 6 59 3 Parameter DM designation DMto DM SCL3 37 1 Parameter word designation word to word 2 6 62 3 Parameter DM designation DMto DM SEC 29 8 Converting from word to word 2 6 44 0 Converting from DMto DM SRCH 28 9 Searching one word and outputting to a word 2 6 1 40 ms DM specification searching 2 048 words and outputting to DM STUP 3 42 ms Constant specification executed first scan 2 6 34 1 Constant specification executed second scan or later 3 44 ms DM specification executed first scan 39 8 DM specification executed second scan or later SUM 22 8 Word added and output to word 2 6 1 44 ms DM specification 999 bytes added and output to DM SYNC 34 6 Constant ratio specification when executed 2 6 35 3 Word ratio specification when executed 42 5 DM ratio specification when executed 25 3 Word ratio specification when changed 32 6 DM ratio specification when changed TIML Reset IL JMP 12 8 Normal execution constant specification 17 9 17 5 8 1 13 5 Interrupt execution constant specification 25 7 25 5 8 1 TMHH Reset IL JMP 12 3 Normal execution constant specification 15 6 15 1 7 4 12 7 Interrupt execution constant specification 17 2 16 9 9 1 12 7 Normal execution DM specification 23 6 2
68. Terminal 6 2 mm max ONO Recommended wire diameter when using solid wires 0 6 to 1 6 mm AWG 22 to 14 Grounding To prevent electric shock resulting from malfunction due to factors such as noise connect to a ground of 100 Q or less When grounding use a wire at least 1 25 mm thick N WARNING Connect the ground terminal of the Power Supply Unit to a ground of 100 Q or less when installing the Unit Not connecting to a ground of 100 Q or less may result in electric shock Ground of 100 Q or less Power Supply Wiring e To prevent voltage drops caused by startup currents and inrush currents from other devices wire the power supply circuits of the CPM2C S separately from power line circuits e When using several CPM2C S PCs together it is recommended that circuits are wired separately in order to prevent circuit breaker malfunctions and volt age drops due to inrush current e Twist power supply lines to prevent noise from the power supply lines Noise can further be prevented by wiring via a 1 1 isolation transformer 60 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING e Use wires at least 1 25 mm thick in order to allow for voltage drops and to keep the current within the allowable level 3 100 to 240 VAC Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to a torque of 0 74 to 0 9 Nem Loose screws may result in burning or malfunction The 24 VDC servi
69. Unit I O Outputs 10 I O points 6 inputs 24 VDC 4 relay outputs CPM2C 10EDR 20 I O points 12 inputs 24 VDC 8 relay outputs CPM2C 20EDR 8 output points 8 relay outputs CPM2C 8ER Units with Transistor Outputs via Fujitsu compatible Connector 24 I O Points 32 I O Points 8 Input Points 8 Output Points 16 Input Points 16 Output Points Unit I O Outputs 24 I O points 16 inputs 24 VDC 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 24EDTC 8 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 24EDT1C 32 I O points 16 inputs 24 VDC 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 32EDTC 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 32EDT1C 8 input points 8 inputs 24 VDC CPM2C 8EDC 16 input points 16 inputs 24 VDC CPM2C 16EDC 8 output points 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 8ETC 8 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 8ET1C 16 output points 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 16ETC 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 16ET1C 12 System Configurations Section 1 2 Units with Transistor Outputs via MIL Connector 24 I O Points 32 I O Points 8 Input or 16 Input or 8 Output Points 16 Output Points Unit I O Outputs 24 I O points 16 inputs 24 VDC 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 24EDTM 8 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 24EDT1M 32 I O points 16 inputs 24 VDC 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 32EDTM 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 32EDT1M 8 input points 8 inputs 24 VDC Sg CPM2C
70. WRITE BYTE DATA response service code 9E Hex e Control Words Word Contents Hex Function Number of bytes of command data beginning with word S 32 Hex specifies 50 bytes Number of bytes of response data beginning with word D 08 Hex specifies 8 bytes Destination network address 01 Hex Master s node number 3F Hex specifies 63 Master s unit address FE Hex specifies the local Unit Response required Transmission port number 00 Hex specifies 0 Number of retries 00 Hex specifies 0 Response monitoring time 64 Hex specifies 10 0 seconds Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 C200HX HG HE PCs Reading Data with IOWR Example Network Conditions IOWR Operand Details IOWR C S D This example shows the instruction operands and results when 20 words of data IR 010 to IR029 in a Slave are read through a Master mounted in a C200HX HG HE PC and stored in words DM 2000 to DM 2019 Refer to the DeviceNet CompoBus D Masters Operation Manual for details on explicit messages and refer to the C200HX HG HE Programmable Controllers Operation Manual for details on IOWR The Master s node number is 63 the Slave s network address is 0 and the Slave s node number is 2 e Control Code Contents Function Hex Master s node number 3F Hex specifies 63 Master s unit address FE Hex specifies the local Unit
71. Writing an Unsigned Decimal Number Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 13 The first operand is input as an unsigned integer Input the value of the operand from 0 to 65535 E B Note If an erroneous input is made press the CLR Key to restore the status prior to the input Then enter the correct input 14 Restore the hexadecimal display SHIFT 7 Note If an input is made outside of the permissible range a buzzer will sound and the hexadecimal display will not be displayed WRITE 15 The second operand is input as a signed integer Input the value of the operand from 32 768 to 32 767 Use the SET Key to input a positive number and use the RESET Key to input a negative number B A ks RESET 1 0 Note If an erroneous input is made press the CLR Key to restore the status prior to the input Then enter the correct input 16 Restore the hexadecimal display me i e Writing a Word Address DM 0000 17 Input the final operand and then press the WRITE Key It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes 3 D m WRITE ojm 8 4 8 Instruction Search This operation is used to find occurrences of the specified instruction in the pro gram and is possible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM The ON OFF status of any displayed bit will be show
72. bla 8 4 25 Clear Force Set Reset eteco etima ee en i ie eels Di eons be ta 8 4 26 Hex ASCII Display Change 0 0 cee eee eee ee eee 8 4 27 Displaying the Cycle Time 0 eee eee 8 4 28 Reading and Setting the Clock 0 2 eee eee eee 8 5 Programming Example ssion ha hoes aN EN Se Ae awe ee eee oak es 8 5 1 Preparatory Operations 0 0 cece eee 8 5 2 Example Progra ce ce heen tie en te ee te ee ee Bb eas 8 5 3 Programming Procedures 0 00 eee cece teens 8 5 4 Checking the Program 0 ea ee cee 8 5 5 Test Run in MONITOR Mode 0 0 c cece eee 155 SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 8 1 8 1 SYSMAC CPT Support Software 8 1 1 Introduction The SYSMAC CPT Support Software is a complete programming and control package It provides not only programming capabilities but also advanced debugging monitoring and program data management The software is com patible with Windows 3 1 Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows NT 3 5 4 0 Any version of the SYSMAC CPT Support Software can be used to program CPM2C S PCs with the limitations described later in this section For further information and actual operating procedures please refer to the SYSMAC CPT Support Software Quick Start Guide W332 and User Manual W333 Refer to 3 4 9 Programming Device Connections for details on connecting a personal computer to the CPM2C S 8 1 2 Limitations and Precautions Program
73. capacity 0 5 mA Max inrush current 0 9 A for 10 ms charging and discharging waveform Leakage current 0 1 mA max Residual voltage 0 8 V max ON delay OUT01000 and OUT01001 20 us max OUT01002 and up 0 1 ms max OFF delay OUT01000 and OUT01001 40 us max 10 to 300 mA 0 1 ms max 0 5 to 10 mA OUT01002 and up 1 ms max 1 fuse for each 2outputs cannot be replaced by user 37 Unit Components Section 2 2 Specification Circuit configuration Sinking Outputs n 5 8 E 8 c o 2 Internal circuits Output LED 38 Unit Components Section 2 2 Note The following graph shows the maximum switching capacity Output current mA 300 40 gt Output 4 5 20 4 26 4 voltage v Z N Caution Do not apply voltage in excess of the maximum switching capacity to an output terminal It may result in damage to the product or fire N Caution Check that wiring has been performed correctly before supplying power Sup plying power with incorrect wiring may result in damage to internal circuits Expansion I O Unit I O Specifications Note Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual W356 for the I O specifications of the Expansion I O Units 39 Unit Components Section 2 2 2 1 4 AC Power Supply Unit Specifications Item Specification Rating 24 VDC 600 mA Efficiency 75 min at rated output Input
74. catches top and bottom on the connectors fit together Press the Units together to connect them i a 1 N 3 Lock the Units together by closing the locks top and bottom on the CPU Unit or previous Expansion I O Unit or Expansion Unit Place the cover in cluded with the CPU Unit on the last Units expansion I O connector a Slide to lock Si Trea Units together tr Expansion I O connector cover 3 3 2 CPM2C S Installation The CPM2C S can be installed on a 35 mm DIN track DIN Track kay PFP 100N 1 m PFP 50N 50 cm End Plates PFP 100N2 1 m PFP M 56 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Installation Lower the CPM2C S so that the notch on the back of the PC catches the top of the DIN Track Push the PC forward until the lock snaps into place lal E ie Insert onto track 3 Pushin on i the Unit 1 Pull down N Caution Be sure that the DIN Track is installed horizontally Installing the Track vertically will inhibit the airflow that cools the CPM2C S and could cause overheating Removal Pry the lock down with a flat blade screwdriver and pivot the PC upward to remove it 57 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 Wiring and Connections This section provides basic information on wiring the CPU Unit and Power Sup ply Unit and on connecting Programming Devices 3 4 1 General Precautions for Wiring Z N Caution
75. conditions Rated voltage 100 to 240 VAC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Allowable voltage range 85 to 264 VAC Current 100V 0 4A 200V 0 2A Leakage 100 V 0 5 mA max at rated output current 200 V 1 mA max at rated output Inrush current 100V_ 15A at 25 C cold start 200 V 30A at 25 C cold start Output Output voltage accuracy 10 15 including input load and temperature fluctuations characteristics Minimum output current 30 mA Ripple noise voltage 2 p p max Input fluctuation 0 75 max Load fluctuation 4 max Temperature fluctuation 0 05 C max Startup time 300 ms max at input voltage of 100 VAC or 200 VAC and the rated output Output hold time 10 ms at input voltage of 100 VAC or 200 VAC and the rated output Overcurrent protection Self resetting operates at 105 to 350 of the rated current suspended and independent operation Overvoltage protection None Ambient operating temperature 0 to 55 C Ambient storage temperature 20 to 75 C Ambient operating humidity 10 to 90 no condensation Dielectric strength 2 000 V for 1 min between all inputs and GR Leakage current 10 mA 3 000 V for 1 min between all inputs and all outputs Leakage current 10 mA 1 000 V for 1 min between all outputs and GR Leakage current 10 mA Insulation resistance 100 MQ min at 500 VDC between all outputs and any input and between all outputs and GR Vi
76. connect via CS1W CN114 or CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable Communications setting 1 start bit 7 data bits even parity 2 stop bits 9 600 bps EEPROM See note 1 256 Kbit EEPROM ATMEL AT28C256 OMRON EEROM JD Current consumption 129 mA max Dimensions Main body not including cables or connectors 57 x 92 x 38 mm W x H x D Weight 200 g max not including EEPROM Note 1 The EEPROM must be purchased separately 2 For general specifications refer to the relevant PC manual 10 2 2 Nomenclature Peripheral Port Connector Lock Lever EEPROM Socket Lock Lever For mounting and removing EEPROM DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button Writes all EEPROM data ladder programs data memory etc to the PC UPLOAD DM Button z Reads PC user program and contents of Indicator DOWNLOAD to PLC Button DM 6144 to DM 6655 to EEPROM UPLOAD DM Button UPLOAD Button UPLOAD Button Reads only PC user program to EEPROM Note The PLC in the DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button indicates PCs Programmable Controllers 223 Handling Section 10 3 LED Indicator CONNECT ERR red Meaning green OFF OFF Not connected to PC power supply OFF ON OFF Connected to a recognized PC Blinking OFF Uploading downloading data ON Blinking Host link communications error retry by user OFF ON PC model and EEPROM data not compatible OFF Blinking One of the following errors has
77. counters TIM CNT 000 to TIM CNT 255 1 ms timers TMHH 10 ms timers TIMH 15 100 ms timers TIM 1 s 10 s timers TIML Decrementing counters CNT Reversible counters CNTR 12 CompoBus S Master functions Up to 32 Slaves can be connected and up to 256 I O points can be controlled DeviceNet Slave functions DeviceNet Remote I O Link Use up to 1 024 I O points in the I O Link Explicit Message Communications Any PC data area can be accessed from the Master Data memory Read Write 2 048 words DM 0000 to DM 2047 Read only 456 words DM 6144 to DM 6599 PC Setup 56 words DM 6600 to DM 6655 The Error Log is contained in DM 2000 to DM 2021 Interrupt processing 2 interrupts Shared by the external interrupt inputs counter mode and the quick response inputs Interval timer interrupts 1 Scheduled Interrupt Mode or Single Interrupt Mode High speed counter One high speed counter 20 kHz single phase or 5 kHz two phase linear count method Counter interrupt 1 set value comparison or set value range comparison Interrupt Inputs Counter mode 2 inputs Shared by the external interrupt inputs and the quick response inputs Pulse output 2 points with no acceleration deceleration 10 Hz to 10 KHz each and no direction control One point with trapezoid acceleration deceleration 10 Hz to 10 kHz and direction control Two points with variable duty ratio outputs
78. data from the DeviceNet Master to the 122 specified node s data area in byte units When word data is being written the leftmost byte is written before the rightmost byte Up to 200 bytes can be written at one time READ WORD DATA Reads the specified node s data in word units 123 two byte units from the DeviceNet Master When word data is being read the leftmost byte is read before the rightmost byte Up to 100 words can be read at one time WRITE WORD DATA Writes data from the DeviceNet Master to the 124 specified node s data area in word units two byte units When word data is being written the leftmost byte is written before the rightmost byte Up to 100 words can be written at one time ERROR RESPONSE The CPM2C S returns an error response when 125 there is an error in the explicit message command sent from the DeviceNet Master 1 When sending explicit message commands the range of data specified by the data area starting address and number of bytes must not exceed the range of the CPM2C S data area Use the READ BYTE DATA and WRITE BYTE DATA commands when sending explicit message commands from an OMRON DeviceNet Master Use the READ WORD DATA and WRITE WORD DATA commands when sending explicit message commands from another company s DeviceNet Master The number of bytes occupied by the Class ID and Instance ID parame ters varies from Master to Master These p
79. eg es ee aes Sos See ae 8 4 3 Reading Clearing Error Messages 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 8 4 4 Buzzer Operation 0 te ee eee tenes 8 4 5 Assigning Expansion Instruction Function Codes 00 00 0005 8 4 6 Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and Monitoring I O Bit Status 8 4 7 Entering or Editing Programs 0 0 cece ee eee 8 4 8 Instruction Search 1 0 0 ee e e e E ee eee ene nes 8 4 9 Bit Operand Search inna isos elias SRE Re SONS Ree eNO OS 8 4 10 Inserting and Deleting Instructions 0 00 0 eee eee eee 8 4 11 Checking the Program 0 eee cece eens 8 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor 0 0 eect ee eee 8 4 13 Differentiation Monitor 0 0 2 8 4 14 Binary Monitor 00 eee tenes 8 4 15 Three Word Monitor 00 0 e ee eee eee nee 8 4 16 Signed Decimal Monitor 0 ccc eee eee eee eens 8 4 17 Unsigned Decimal Monitor 0 0 eee eee eee eee 8 4 18 Three Word Data Modification 0 0c cece eee eee 8 4 19 Changing Timer Counter SV 0 eee eee 8 4 20 Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification 0 0 ccc eee eee 8 4 21 Binary Data Modification 0 ee eee ee eee 8 4 22 Signed Decimal Data Modification 0 0 eee eee eee eee 8 4 23 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification 0 0 0 2 ee eee ee eee 8 4 24 Forc Set Reset sc se le ibe oe ere nals Sb ee ba eae
80. for a timer or counter press the LD AND OR or NOT Key followed by the TIM or CNT Key and then input the timer counter number last Input the second instruction and operand In this case it isn t necessary to enter the timer number because it s 000 Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory rm Jimer number Input the second operand 123 to specify 12 3 seconds and press the WRITE Key The next program address will be displayed odada 1 2 3 WRITE If a mistake was made inputting the operand press the Up Arrow Key to return to display the mistaken operand and input the operand again Note a Counters are input in the same basic way as timers except the CNT Key is pressed instead of the TIM Key b Timer and counter SVs are input in BCD so it isn t necessary to press the CONT Key 177 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 178 8 Input the third instruction and its operands First input the instruction by pressing the FUN Key and then the function code 21 in this case oan FUN 2 1 To input the differentiated version of an instruction press the NOT Key after the function code FUN 2 1 NOT The symbol will be displayed next to differentiated instructions Press the NOT Key again to change back the instruction back to a non differentiated instruction The symbol will dis appear To change an instructi
81. in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion I O Units may operate unex pectedly 1 Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described in 8 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor f two or more words are being monitored the desired word should be leftmost on the display Word monitor 2 Press the CHG Key to begin hexadecimal BCD data modification CHG 3 Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV The operation will end and the normal monitoring display will return when the WRITE Key is pressed Begs 2 0 o iwrite 189 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 8 4 21 Binary Data Modification N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to change the status of a word s bits when the word is monitored using the procedure described in 8 4 14 Binary Monitor It is pos sible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Bits SR 25300 to SR 25507 and timer counter flags cannot be changed Before changing the conte
82. language Ladder diagram Instruction length 1 step per instruction 1 to 5 words per instruction Instructions Basic instructions 14 Special instructions 105 instructions 185 variations Execution time Basic instructions 0 64 us LD instruction Special instructions 7 8 ws MOV instruction Program capacity 4 096 words Max I O CPU Unit only 10 points capacity Expanded 338 points max system Input bits 160 bits IR 00000 to IR 00915 Bits not used for input bits can be used for work bits Output bits 160 bits IR 01000 to IR 01915 Bits not used for output bits can be used for work bits CompoBus S input bits 128 bits IR 02000 to IR 02715 Bits not used for CompoBus S input bits can be used for work bits CompoBus S output bits 128 bits IR 03000 to IR 03715 Bits not used for CompoBus S output bits can be used for work bits Work bits 672 bits IR 02800 to IR 02915 IR 03800 to IR 04915 and IR 20000 to IR 22715 Special bits SR area 448 bits SR 22800 to SR 25515 Temporary bits TR area 8 bits TRO to TR7 Holding bits HR area 320 bits HR 0000 to HR 1915 Words HR 00 to HR 19 Auxiliary bits AR area 384 bits AR 0000 to AR 2315 Words AR 00 to AR 23 Link bits LR area 256 bits LR 0000 to LR 1515 Words LR 00 to LR 15 32 Unit Components Section 2 2 Item Specifications Timers Counters 256 timers
83. masking interrupt processes Max number of CompoBus S Slaves memory backup Expansion Memory Unit protection memory areas AR area bits clearing Programming Console flags and control bits partial clear structure uploading downloading message communications messages reading clearing model numbers modes changing the PC mode operating modes modifying binary data Programming Console data Programming Console hexadecimal BCD data Programming Console signed decimal data Programming Console SV Programming Console unsigned decimal data Programming Console MONITOR mode description example test run monitoring 3 word monitor Programming Console binary monitor Programming Console differentiation monitor Programming Console signed decimal monitor Programming Console status Programming Console unsigned decimal monitor Programming Console motor control capabilities MSG 46 N no protocol communications node number DeviceNet communications noise immunity preventing electrical noise non fatal errors troubleshooting NPN current output connections NPN open collector connections NT Link connections O operating conditions troubleshooting operating modes operating mode at startup operation preparations output short protection output specifications Expansion I O Units transistor output Output Terminals outputs wiring P pa
84. number of Slaves setting as shown below Communications mode Max number of Slaves Communications response time High speed mode 0 5 ms 0 8 ms Long distance mode 4 0 ms 6 0 ms 5 1 2 Setting the CompoBus S Communications Mode The CompoBus S communications mode can be set to high speed mode or long distance mode Communications Max communications Communications speed mode distance trunk line length High speed mode 100 m 750 kbps Long distance mode 500 m 93 75 kbps Use a Programming Device to set the maximum number of Slaves in DM 6603 of the PC Setup as shown in the following table DM 6603 04 to 07 Sets the CompoBus S 0 Hex High speed mode Oori 0 communications mode 1 Hex Long distance mode High speed Note Always turn the power OFF and ON again after changing this setting 110 Communications Status Section 5 3 5 2 Remote I O Communications 5 2 1 Slaves The following table lists the commonly used Slaves Refer to the CompoBus S Operation Manual for more details The SRT1 series Slaves support high speed communications mode only The SRT2 series Slaves support both high speed and long distance communications modes SRT2 series SRT1 series I O Terminals SRT2 ID04 SRT1 ID04 Transistor SRT2 ID04 1 SRT1 IDO4 1 SRT2 ID08 SRT1 ID08 SRT2 ID08 1 SRT1 IDO8 1 SRT2 ID16 SRT1 ID16 SRT2 ID16 1 SRT1 ID16 1 SRT2 ID16T Not available SRT2 ID16T 1 Not available SRT2 OD0
85. of the CPM2C S CPU Unit s DIP switch Refer to 1 3 3 Operating Mode at Startup for complete details 102 Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 4 7 2 Hold Bit Status Make the settings shown below to determine whether when the power supply is turned on the Forced Status Hold Bit SR 25211 and or IOM Hold Bit SR 25212 will retain the status that was in effect when the power was last turned off or whether the previous status will be cleared Bit 15 0 pmesot lo o i aisle SR 25211 setting Always 00 0 Hex Clear status 1 Hex Retain status SR 25212 setting 0 Hex Clear status 1 Hex Retain status Default Clear both The Forced Status Hold Bit SR 25211 determines whether or not the forced set reset status is retained when changing from PROGRAM mode to MONITOR mode The IOM Hold Bit SR 25212 determines whether or not the status of IR bits and LR bits is retained when PC operation is started and stopped 4 7 3 Program Memory Write protection In CPM2C S PCs the program memory can be protected by setting bits 00 to 03 of DM 6602 to 1 Bits 04 to 07 determine whether Programming Console mes sages are displayed in English or Japanese Bit 15 0 DM6602 0 l l l Always 00 B Expansion instruction function code assignments 0 Hex Default settings 1 Hex User assignments Programming Console messages 0 Hex English 1 Hex Japanese
86. of Word and Bit Addresses Except for the TR area and DM area data in the PC s I O memory can be speci fied by bit addresses or word addresses The TR area can be accessed only by bit addresses and the DM area can be accessed only by word addresses The following diagram shows how to specify I O bits 15 18 13 12 11 ao 10 9 7 6 TE T E 54 29 2 i 0 BE CS ED WY RT Bit address aarp I Word Bit number Word Bit number The following memory areas can be used in the CPM2C S Data area Words Bits Function IR Input area IR 000 to IR 009 IR 00000 to IR 00915 These bits are allocated to the external I O area 10 words 160 bits terminals Output area IR 010 to IR 019 IR 01000 to IR 01915 Words not used as I O words can be used 10 words 160 bits as work words CompoBus S IR 020 to IR 027 IR 02000 to IR 02715 These bits are allocated to CompoBus S input area 8 words 128 bits Slaves CompoBus S IR 030 to IR 037 IR 03000 to IR 03715 Words not used as I O words can be used output area 8 words 128 bits as work words Work area IR 028 and IR 029 IR 02800 to IR 02915 Work bits can be freely used within the pro IR 038 to IR 049 IR 03800 to IR 04915 gram IR 200 to IR 227 IR 20000 to IR 22715 42 words 672 bits SR area SR 228 to SR 255 SR 22800 to SR 25515 These bits serve specific functions such as 28 words 448 bits flags and control bits
87. operation is used to change the decimal value of a word being moni tored as signed decimal data within a range of 32 768 to 32 767 The con tents of the specified word are converted automatically to signed hexadeci mal two s complement format Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 N Caution 1 2 3 Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion I O Units may operate unex pectedly 1 Monitor signed decimal the status of the word for which the present value is to be changed Signed decimal monitor 2 Press the CHG Key to begin decimal data modification CHG 3 Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV The operation will end and the signed decimal monitoring display will return when the WRITE Key is pressed The PV can be set within a range of 32 768 and 32 767 Use the SET Key to input a positive number and use the RESET Key to input a negative number D c i fl ILI es If an erroneous input has been made press the CLR Key to restore the sta tus prior to the input Then enter the co
88. press the SHIFT and then the Down Arrow Key The Symes De will appear sey opi z 3 The buzzer will sound when the specified bit goes from off to on for up dif ferentiation or from on to off for down differentiation Note The buzzer will not sound if it has been turned off 4 Press the CLR Key to end differentiation monitoring and return to the normal monitoring display 8 4 14 Binary Monitor This operation is used to monitor the ON OFF status of any word s 16 bits It is possible in any mode Run MONITOR PROGRAM 1 2 3 1 Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described in 8 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor The desired word should be leftmost on the display if 2 or more words are being monitored Word monitor 2 Press the SHIFT and then the MONTR Key to begin binary monitoring The ON OFF status of the selected word s 16 bits will be shown along the bottom of the display A 1 indicates a bit is on and a 0 indicates it is off Bit 15 Bit 00 The status of force set bits is indicated by S and the status of a force reset bits is indicated by R as shown below Force set bit Force reset bit Note a The status of displayed bits can be changed at this point Refer to 8 4 21 Binary Data Modification for details 185 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4
89. shown below Countermeasure 1 Countermeasure 2 OUT to 2 x COM our COMO Providing a dark current of approx one third of the rated value through an incandescent lamp Providing a limiting resistor Fuse Insertion The CPM2C S with transistor output may burn if the load is short circuited therefore insert a protective fuse in series to the load 3 4 7 Wiring CompoBus S Transmission Lines 72 1 2 3 Use special flat cable or VCTF cable for the transmission lines that connect the nodes in the CompoBus S I O Link Special flat cables and VCTF cables cannot be combined in the same system Name Model number Specifications Flat cable XB1T W10 VCTF cable 4 core flat cable 0 75 mm2 2 core VCTF 0 75 x 20 Use the following procedure to wire the CompoBus S communications cables 1 Strip off the length of wire insulation recommended for the crimp connectors being used and tightly twist the bare wire strands together eee Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Note When VCTF cable is being used cover the end of the cable sheathing with elec trical tape or heat shrink tubing as shown in the following diagram Secure the cable sheathing with electrical tape or heat shrink tubing 2 Crimp pin terminals on the stripped ends of the communications cable and secure the terminal and wire with electrical tape or heat shrink tubing Note a We recommend the following pin terminal
90. status 27 Comparison with the CPM2C Section 1 5 Item Analog controls CPM2C S None CPM2C None Clock function Internal Internal or none Words containing time info AR 17 to AR 21 AR 17 to AR 21 Analog I O Analog I O Units can be connected Analog I O Units can be connected Temperature monitoring The CPU Unit can receive temperature sensor input from either thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers The CPU Unit can receive temperature sensor input from either thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers CompoBus S communications A CompoBus S I O Link Unit can be connected to provide CompoBus S Slave functions CompoBus S Master functions are standard in all CPU Units A CompoBus S 1 0 Link Unit can be connected to provide CompoBus S Slave functions Communications switch This switch determines whether communications are governed by the standard settings or PC Setup settings Also sets the Programming Device connection This switch determines whether communications are governed by the standard settings or PC Setup settings Also sets the Programming Device connection Battery Battery Internal lithium battery backup CPU Unit with clock Internal lithium battery backup CPU Unit without clock Capacitor backup or optional lithium battery backup Battery replacement Possible Possible Life expectancy ba
91. switch settings determine the DeviceNet communications speed and control the communications settings for the communications port pe ripheral port and RS 232C port e DeviceNet communications speed O oz HEU r Pin 2 Speed Max transmission line length see note OFF 125 kbps 500 m max OFF 250 kbps 250 m max ON 500 kbps 100 m max ON Not used invalid setting Note Pins 1 and 2 are not used in the CPM2C S100C S110C Leave pins 1 and 2 OFF in those CPU Units e RS 232C and Peripheral Port Settings The ports operate according to the settings in the PC Setup RS 232C port settings DM 6645 to DM 6649 Peripheral port settings DM 6650 to DM 6654 The ports operate with the standard communications settings 43 Unit Components Section 2 2 10 12 ti Enabled 13 44 e Operating Mode at Startup Pin 4 determines the operating mode at startup only if there isn t a Pro gramming Device connected to the peripheral port Programming Device Startup mode with Startup mode with connected pin 4 OFF pin 4 ON None PROGRAM mode RUN mode Programming Console Operating mode set on the Programming Console s mode switch Other device PROGRAM mode Rotary Switches DRT versions only The rotary switches set the PC s node number in the DeviceNet network The allowed setting range is 00 to 63 Settings 64 to 99 are not allowed Battery This batte
92. the ERR data I O NO ERR A data area address has been designated that exceeds the limit of the data area e g an address is too large Confirm the requirements for the instruction and re enter the address Note Refer to the relevant Support Software Operation Manual for details on errors that may appear when operating the SSS or SYSMAC CPT Support Software 208 Programming Errors Section 9 4 9 4 Programming Errors These errors in program syntax will be detected when the program is checked using the Program Check operation Three levels of program checking are available The desired level must be des ignated to indicate the type of errors that are to be detected The following table provides the error types displays and explanations of all syntax errors Check level 0 checks for type A B and C errors check level 1 for type A and B errors and check level 2 for type A errors only Message Meaning and appropriate response A 777 The program has been damaged creating a non existent function code Re enter the program CIRCUIT ERR The number of LD instructions LD or LD NOT does not match the number of logic block instructions OR LD or AND LD Check your program OPERAND ERR A constant entered for the instruction is not within defined values Change the constant so that it lies within the proper range NO END INSTR There is no END 01 in the program Write END 0
93. the Unit Not doing so may result in malfunction e Be sure to attach the labels supplied with the CPM2C S or provide other pro tective covers when wiring in order to prevent dust or wiring cuttings from en tering the Unit e Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipa tion Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction e Use round crimp terminals for wiring the Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning e Be sure to perform wiring in accordance with the CPM2C S Operation Manual Incorrect wiring may result in burning e Do not apply voltages to the input terminals in excess of the rated input voltage Excess voltages may result in burning e Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the output terminals in excess of the maximum switching capacity Excess voltage or loads may result in burning e Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short circuit ing in external wiring Insufficient safety measures against short circuiting may result in burning e Always use the power supply voltage specified in the operation manuals An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning e In areas with an unreliable power supply install devices that will ensure a relia ble power supply within the rated voltage and frequency ranges e Check the user program for proper executio
94. when it is not used as a high speed counter input The minimum pulse widths for inputs INO0000 A phase input and INO0001 B phase input are as follows Pulse plus direction input mode Up down input Differential phase mode mode Increment mode 100 us min ETRE a Stee dee ETA 90 PhaseA f 4 eee eee fice 50 fan ne eee cee ee 10 ON anad me e a a a 90 12 5us 12 5 us Phase B ore ie Woe es Wea Unie cone aoe min min The minimum pulse width for input INO0002 Z phase input is as follows 50 us min ON Phase Z o FF Interrupt Inputs CPM2C S PCs are equipped with inputs that can be used as interrupt inputs in terrupt input mode or counter mode and quick response inputs The minimum pulse width for these inputs is 50 us Inputs IN00003 and IN00004 can be used as interrupt inputs 36 Unit Components Section 2 2 CPU Unit Output Specifications Transistor Outputs Sinking or Sourcing Item Specification Max switching capacity OUT01000 to OUT01005 40 mA 4 5 VDC to 300 mA 20 4 VDC See note 300 mA 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC When using OUT01000 or OUT01001 as a pulse output connect a dummy resistor as required to bring the load current between 10 and 150 mA If the load current is below 10 mA the ON OFF response time will be longer and high speed pulses will not be output The transistor will heat if used at 150 mA or higher possibly damaging elements Min switching
95. 0 cece eee 8 2 SYSMAC Support Software SSS 2 cee eee 8 3 Using a Programming Console 0 0 0 cee eee eee 8 4 Programming Console Operations 0 0 0 2 eee eee ee eee 8 5 Programming Example 0 2 eee ccc eee eee SECTION 9 Test Runs and Error Processing eeeeee 9 1 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure 0 0 0 0 0 02 e eee eee eee 9 2 Self diagnostic Functions 0 0 9 3 Programming Console Operation Errors 0 0 0 c eee ee eee 9 4 Programming Errors oi e cee eee e eens 9 5 Troubleshooting Flowcharts seiss ersari nne e na oE E ANE EE E OR EE ES 9 6 Maintenance Inspections 0 eee cece eee eee eens 9 7 Battery Replacement 22 2 5 0 00 das Seb riis an A SA eae ae eee eae ee eels SECTION 10 Expansion Memory Unit cece cece eens TO OVETVICW m rninn a oia 3A wth ANE te De N bak nS RY Stay to Re Oe aoe 10 2 Specifications and Nomenclature 0 0 ee eee 10 3 Handling 2 5 2204 does Ae ot hd ea aid Bh ee os hee Bb ee a eG RS Appendices A Standard Models 2cc9 ace c8 Se 8 ere eee see eRe CREMORNE OLE SEL RR OLE EMRE Sees Be Dimensions EAEL ARENES acto wre a eatin he Se anand Oa In eV aa we att te bane Index osccew estas eiwstte Souk cesses caecewn Sead Revision History 0 0s 56 6 s40444 0asseesd waaee sd eas viii About this Manual The CPM2C S is a compact high speed Programmable Controlle
96. 0 oooNnNogoQJAAUON O0O Any other setting specifies a node number of 00 causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302 08 to 11 Start code selection for no protocol communications 0 Hex Disables start code 1 Hex Enables start code in DM 6649 Any other setting disables the start code causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302 12to 15 End code selection for no protocol communications 0 Hex Disables end code 1 Hex Enables end code in DM 6649 2 Hex Sets end code of CR LF Any other setting disables the end code causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302 00 to 07 Start code 00 to FF This setting is valid only when bits 8 to 11 of DM 6648 are set to 1 08 to 15 When bits 12 to 15 of DM 6648 set to 0 Sets the number of bytes to receive 00 256 bytes 01 to FF 1 to 255 bytes When bits 12 to 15 of DM 6648 set to 1 Sets the end code 00 to FF 100 Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 Word s Bis Function S Peripheral Port Communications Settings The following settings are read regularly by the CPU while the PC is ON If pin 3 of the CPM2C S CPU Unit s DIP switch is ON communications through the CPM2C S peripheral port are gov erned by the default settings all 0 regardless of the settings in DM 6645 through DM 6649 When connecting a computer running OMRON Support Software to the peripheral bus turn OFF pin 3 of the DIP
97. 0 0 cece eee nee S Application Precautions ssis sesir iadso ES be og ak Se sad E tug A eg SEU OBC Difrectiyes shia ies das BAe satin n ahs Gk ea ih Ante als BA aah A aah tenants SECTION 1 Introduction eoeeeees5qu3scvc1eeeexxc5cee3ueoe3uwaew oee e3eoeoe3we oees e3ese53uweoe ee5neeee8 1 1 CPM2C S Features and Functions 0 0 0 0 0c ccc ccc ccc cece eee eens 1 2 System Configurations 0 0 cece eee eee eens 1 3 CPM2C S Structure and Operation 0 0 c eee eee l 4 Functions Listed by Usage 20 0 ccc eee eee 1 5 Comparison with the CPM2C 0 aN EAE EEE eee eee 1 6 Preparation for Operation 0 2 SECTION 2 Unit Components and Specifications 2 1 Specifications soo hats hehe RBA SS RSS Sa ee RRS Oe ae ea RS OE des 2 2 Unit Components acc nce cee sa E ease eG PE eae Gea e Re Se ERS 6 SECTION 3 Installation and Wiring ccc cece cece wees 3 1 Design Precautions 5 a n e nari ete ee ae aia ada ada 3 2 Selecting an Installation Site 0 eee eee 3 3 Installing the CPM2C S o c5 okies ces gee ka eae seals halen 3 4 Wiring and Connections 0 0 ccc eect eens SECTION 4 Memory Areas eeeeeees3sos 5eeeeoeoe e0usexeenevoe0eseoeoe3uwewoenese3e3eo oe3ueo oe3e sonewe3we e ee amp e eegee 4 1 Allocation of Word and Bit Addresses 0 0 cece eee eee 4 2 I O Allocation for CPM2C S PCs 0 eee eens 4 3 I O Allocation to
98. 00HS or C200HX HG HE PC This area is used to manage timers and counters created with TIM TIMH 15 TMHH TIML CNT and CNTR 12 The same numbers are used for both timers and counters and each number can be used only once in the user program Do not use the same TC number twice even for different instructions Use TC numbers 000 through 003 for TIMH 15 and TC numbers 004 to 007 for TMHH When these timer numbers are used timing is performed as an in terrupt process and the cycle timer does not affect timer operation TC numbers are used to create timers and counters as well as to access Completion Flags and present values PVs If a TC number is designated for word data it will access the present value PV if it is used for bit data it will ac cess the Completion Flag for the timer counter DM area data is accessed in word units only The contents of the DM area are retained even after the PC power supply has been turned off or when operation begins or stops Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 Note DM words DM 0000 through DM 1999 and DM 2022 through DM 2047 can be used freely in the program other DM words are allocated specific functions de scribed below DM 2000 through DM 2021 contain the error log information Refer to Section 9 Troubleshooting for details on the error log DM 6600 through DM 6655 contain the PC Setup Refer to 4 6 PC Setup for de tails 85
99. 01 00 to 15 Reserved for the system These bits cannot be used AR 02 00 Expansion Unit Error Flag for 1st Unit These flags turn ON when there 01 Expansion Unit Error Flag for 2nd Unit ie error in the corresponding 02 Expansion Unit Error Flag for 3rd Unit 03 to 07 Not used 08 to 11 Number of Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units connected 12 to 15 Not used AR 03 00 to 15 Not used AR 04 00 to 07 CompoBus S Active Slave Flags for OUT 0 to OUT7 ON when the Slave is communicating 08 to 15 CompoBus S Slave Communications Error Flags for OUT 0 to OUT7 AR 05 00 to 07 CompoBus S Active Slave Flags for INO to IN7 ON when the Slave is communicating 08 to 15 CompoBus S Slave Communications Error Flags for INO to IN7 AR 06 00 to 07 CompoBus S Active Slave Flags for OUT 8 to OUT15 ON when the Slave is communicating 08 to 15 CompoBus S Slave Communications Error Flags for OUT 8 to OUT15 AR 07 00 to 07 CompoBus S Active Slave Flags for IN8 to IN15 ON when the Slave is communicating 08 to 15 CompoBus S Slave Communications Error Flags for IN8 to IN15 92 Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 Word s Function RS 232C Port Error Code 0 Normal completion 1 Parity error 2 Frame error 3 Overrun error 04 RS 232C Communications Error Flag Turns ON when an RS 232C port communications error occurs 05 RS 232C Transmit Ready Flag T
100. 1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 C200HS or C200HX HG HE PC The 7 System Configurations Section 1 2 1 1 PC Link allows automatic data link connections The PC must be connected to the communications port as an RS 232C port not as a peripheral port 1 1 2 Overview of CPM2C S Functions CompoBus S Master functions e Remote I O devices can be allocated up to 256 I O points 128 inputs and 128 outputs in input area IR 020 to IR 027 and output area IR 030 to IR 037 e The node numbers can be set to 0 to 7 128 point mode or 0 to 15 256 point mode e The communications mode can be set to high speed mode max length 100 m or long dis tance mode max length 500 m DeviceNet Slave e Up to 64 words 32 input words and 32 output words can be allocated to the DeviceNet Mas functions ter s I O The Master s I O can be allocated to the following data areas IR 000 to IR 049 IR 200 to IR 227 DM 0000 to DM 2047 LR 00 to LR 15 HR 00 to HR 19 AR 00 to AR 23 CPM2C Master read only TC 000 to TC 255 e Explicit message communications are supported Any CPM2C S data area can be accessed from the DeviceNet Master e The communications speed can be set to 500 kbps total network length 100 m max 250 kbps total network length 250 m max or 125 kbps total network length 500 m max Interrupts Interrupt inputs 2 inputs Response time 50 us Interval timer interrupts Scheduled interrupts 1 input
101. 1 at the end of the program LOCN ERR An instruction is in the wrong place in the program Check instruction requirements and correct the program JME UNDEFD A JME 05 instruction is missing for a JMP 04 instruction Correct the jump number or insert the proper JME 05 instruction DUPL The same jump number or subroutine number has been used twice Correct the program so that the same number is only used once for each SBN UNDEFD An SBN 92 has not been programmed with the same subroutine number as an SBS 91 instruction in the program Correct the program STEP ERR STEP 08 with a section number and STEP 08 without a section number have been used incorrectly Check STEP 08 programming requirements and correct the program B IL ILC ERR IL 02 and ILC 03 are not used in pairs Correct the program so that each IL 02 has a unique ILC 03 Although this error message will appear if more than one IL 02 is used with the same ILC 03 the program will executed as written Make sure your program is written as desired before proceeding JMP JME ERR JMP 04 and JME 05 are not used in pairs Make sure your program is written as desired before proceeding SBN RET ERR RET 93 has not been used properly or the relationship between SBN 92 and RET 93 is not correct Correct the program C COIL DUPL The same bit is being controlled i e turned ON and or OFF by more than one instru
102. 1 0 Line Noise 58 Leave the protective label in place while wiring The Unit may malfunction if strands of wire get inside the Unit After completing wiring be sure to remove the label to avoid overheating Protective label Do not run CPM2C S I O lines in the same duct or conduit as power lines Hanging Ducts Leave at least 300 mm between the power cables and the I O or control wiring as shown in the following diagram CompoBus S and DeviceNet a communications cables 300 mm min CPM2C S I O lines Control cables and CPM2C S power lines 300 mm min ee Power cables Floor Ducts Leave at least 200 mm between the wiring and the top of the duct as shown in the following diagram CompoBus S and DeviceNet Control cables and Zommunicatione cables CPM2C S CPM2C S power Power VO lines lines cables Metal plate iron Ji 200 mm min Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Conduits Separate the CPM2C S I O lines power and control lines and power cables as shown in the following diagram CPM2C S Control cables Power CompoBus S and I O lines and CPM2C S_ cables DeviceNet communications power lines cables i 0 AOLLELEPEELE PEP EELEEELELEEEEPEL EL ELEE EEE EP 3 4 2 Power Supply Wiring The following procedure explains how to connect the CPU Unit to the AC Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 with the power supply connector included to pro vide a 24 VDC power supply Power s
103. 1 63 ms Note 1 The CompoBus S communications wait time can be calculated by subtract ing the time required for processes 9 10 11 and 1 from the CompoBus S communications response time CompoBus S wait time CompoBus S response time 9 10 11 1 138 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 When the peripheral port is being used in the example above the calcula tion result is negative and the CompoBus S wait time is negligible Max number of CompoBus S communications mode nodes setting response time High speed mode 16 0 5 ms 32 0 8 ms 32 6 0 ms 2 The cycle time can be read from a Programming Device 3 AR 14 contains the max cycle time and AR 15 contains the current cycle time 4 The actual cycle time will vary slightly from the calculated value due to varia tions in processing from cycle to cycle If the cycle time is shorter than the CompoBus S communications response time the actual cycle time will be equal to the CompoBus S communications re sponse time With short cycle times the CompoBus S communications re sponse time will become the minimum cycle time this is especially true when long distance mode is being used 7 1 4 Instruction Execution Times The following table lists the execution times for CPM2C S instructions Basic Instructions Mnemonic ON execution Conditions Top min bottom max OFF execution time us time us
104. 189 Hexadecimal BCD data Changes the BCD or hexadecimal value of a word being monitored 189 modification Binary data modification Changes the status of a word s bits when the word is being monitored 190 Signed decimal data Changes the decimal value of a word being monitored as signed decimal 190 modification data within a range of 32 768 to 32 767 The contents of the specified word are converted automatically to signed hexadecimal two s complement format Unsigned decimal data Changes the decimal value of a word being monitored as unsigned 191 modification Force set reset Clear force set reset Hex ASCII display change 172 decimal data within a range of 0 to 65 535 A change into hexadecimal data is made automatically Forces bits ON force set or OFF force reset 192 Restores the status of all bits which have been force set of reset 193 Converts word data displays back and forth between 4 digit hexadecimal data and ASCII 193 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 Po Name Function Pager Displaying the cycle time Displays the current average cycle time scan time Reading and setting the clock Reads or sets the internal clock 8 4 2 Clearing Memory All Clear 1 2 3 Z N Caution Partial Clear 1 2 3 This operation is used to clear all or part of the Program Memory and data areas as well as the contents of the Programming Console s memory This operation is poss
105. 2 IN1 INO IN7 IN6 INS IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO ARO6 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ARO7 IN15 IN14 IN13 IN12 IN11 IN10 INQ IN8 IN15 IN14 IN13 IN12 IN11 IN10 IN9 IN8 Note 1 INO to IN15 are the input terminals and OUTO to OUT15 are the output termi nals 2 When the maximum number of CompoBus S units is set to 16 IN8 to IN15 and OUT8 to OUT15 cannot be used 3 Each Active Slave Flag is turned ON when the corresponding Slave is par ticipating in communications When the power to the CPU Unit is turned OFF and ON again all of the Active Slave Flags are turned OFF 4 Each Slave Communications Error Flag is turned ON when a Slave that was participating in the network is separated from the network The bit is turned OFF when the Slave re enters the network 5 An error is not generated at the CPM2C S if there are duplicated node address settings for Slaves or if there is a communications error such as communications failure or a disconnection Therefore use the above status flags in the ladder program to confirm whether or not node addresses are set correctly and whether or not Slaves are operating correctly Example CompoBus S communications path Disconnection 2 A E 1 IR 000 IR 001 IR
106. 232C Adapter Unit Front View Right Side 1 RS 422 485 port Fa III E a il 3 Terminating resistance switch 2 RS 232C port J Fa 4 RS 485 interface switch 5 Connector Note Do not use the CPM2C CIF11 with any PC other than a CPM2C or CPM2C S 1 2 3 1 RS 422 485 Port Used to connect to host computers or standard external devices Terminal Arrangement RDA Receive data input RDB SDA Send data output SDB __ NC Note The maximum line length is 500 m 2 RS 232C Port Used to connect to the RS 232C interface of a personal computer or Pro grammable Terminal operator interface Connector Pin Arrangement O 5CTS 8 3 AD X ONG 2 TxD 1NC O 48 Unit Components Section 2 2 RS 422 485 Connection Example CPM2C CIF11 B500 AL004 Internal Configuration RS 422 485 port terminal block RS 232C port D sub connector CPM2C CIF 11 CMOS level gt RS 422 conversion i CPM2C S CPU Unit Peripheral port CMOS level RS 232C port RS 232C RS 422 485 Signal Converts CMOS level CPU Unit side to RS 422 port on conversion connected device side CPM2C CIF11 RS 422 externally connected device insulated using DC DC converter or photocoupler Function Host Link peripheral bus or no protocol connections RS 232C port Signal Outputs signals from the CPU Units
107. 3 3 7 7 13 6 Interrupt execution DM specification 25 1 24 7 9 1 ZCP 9 4 Comparing a constant to a constant range and 2 6 output to word 11 8 Comparing a word to a word range and output to word 33 4 Comparing DMto DMandoutputto DM ZCPL 19 5 Comparing a word to a word range 2 6 45 2 Comparing DMto DM 148 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 7 2 VO Response Time 7 2 1 CPM2C S I O Response Time The I O response time is the time it takes after an input signal has been received i e after an input bit has turned ON for the PC to check and process the in formation and to output a control signal i e to output the result of the proces sing to an output bit The I O response time varies according to the timing and processing conditions The minimum and maximum I O response times are shown here using the fol lowing program as an example Output Input f The following conditions are taken as examples for calculating the I O response times Input ON delay 10 ms input time constant default setting Overseeing time 1 ms includes I O refreshing Instruction execution time 14 ms Output ON delay 15 ms Communications ports Not used Minimum I O Response Time The CPM2C S responds most quickly when it receives an input signal just prior to I O refreshing as shown in the illustration below Input point Input ON delay 10 ms Input bit
108. 4 SRT1 OD04 SRT2 OD04 1 SRT1 OD04 1 SRT2 OD08 SRT1 OD08 SRT2 OD08 1 SRT1 OD08 1 SRT2 OD16 SRT1 OD16 SRT2 OD16 1 SRT1 OD16 1 SRT2 OD16T Not available SRT2 OD16T 1 Not available SRT2 MD16T Not available SRT2 MD16T 1 Not available Connector Terminals SRT2 VIDO8S Not available Transistor SRT2 VIDO8S 1 SRT2 VID16ML SRT2 VID16ML 1 SRT2 ID32ML SRT2 ID32ML 1 SRT2 VOD08S SRT2 VOD08S 1 SRT2 VOD16ML SRT2 VOD16ML 1 SRT2 OD32ML SRT2 OD32ML 1 SRT2 MD32ML SRT2 MD32ML 1 Output Terminals SRT2 ROC08 SRT1 ROCO08 Relay outputs SRT2 ROC16 SRT1 ROC16 Output Terminals SRT2 ROF08 SRT1 ROF08 Power MOSFET outputs SRT2 ROF16 SRT1 ROF16 I O Modules Not available SRT1 ID16P SRT1 OD16P Analog Terminals SRT2 AD04 Not available SRT2 DA02 Sensor Amplifier Terminals Not available SRT1 TID04S SRT1 XIDO4S Sensor Terminals Not available SRT1 IDO8S SRT1 OD08S SRT1 ND08S 111 Communications Status Section 5 3 Bit chain Terminal SRT2 series Not available SRT1 series SRT1 B1T Environment Resistive Terminals SRT2 IDO4CL Not available SRT2 IDO4CL 1 SRT2 ID08 SRT2 IDO8CL 1 SRT2 OD04CL SRT2 OD04CL 1 SRT2 OD08CL SRT2 OD08CL 1 5 2 2 I O Allocation In the CPM2C S CompoBus S input words IR 020 to IR 027 and CompoBus S output words IR 030 to IR 037 are allocated for the CompoBus S Terminal s I O The CompoBus S Terminal s I O INO to IN15 and OUTO to OUT15 are allo cated as indicated in the following table
109. 6603 00 to 03 Maximum number of CompoBus S nodes 0 Hex 256 point mode 32 nodes 1 Hex 128 point mode 16 nodes 04 to 07 CompoBus S communications mode 0 Hex High speed mode 1 Hex Long distance mode 08 to 15 Not used DM 6604 00 to 07 00 Hex A memory error will not be generated if data could not be retained by the battery 01 Hex A memory error will be generated if data could not be retained by the battery 08 to 15 Not used DM 6605 00 to 03 DeviceNet Read Write area settings 0 Hex Read area IN IR 020 to IR 027 Write area OUT IR 030 to IR 037 1 Hex Use settings in DM 6606 to DM 6609 04 to 07 Transmission of CPM2C S status to the DeviceNet Master 0 Hex Attach status information ahead of data 1 Hex Do not attach status information ahead of data 08 to 15 Not used DM 6606 00 to 07 DeviceNet I O Link Write Data area OUT area settings 01 Hex I O area 1 IR 000 to IR 049 Master CPM2C S 02 Hex I O area 2 IR 200 to IR 227 03 Hex DM area DM 0000 to DM 2047 04 Hex LR area LR 00 to LR 15 05 Hex HR area HR 00 to HR 19 07 Hex Timer counter area TC 000 to TC 255 08 to 15 Number of bytes 01 to 40 Hex equivalent to 0 to 64 decimal DM 6607 00 to 15 Starting word address 0000 to 07FF Hex equivalent to 0000 to 2047 decimal 97 PC Setup Section 4 6 Word s Bit s Function 00 to 07 DeviceNet I O Link Read Data area IN area settin
110. 6655 0 Low battery voltage detection Always 0 Hex Detect 0 1 Hex Don t detect Cycle time over detection 0 Hex Detect 1 Hex Don t detect Error log storage method 0 Hex Error records for the 7 most recent errors always stored older errors de leted 1 Hex Only the first 7 error records stored no errors stored beyond that point 2 to F Hex Error records not stored Default Low battery voltage and cycle time over errors detected and error records stored for the 7 most recent errors Battery errors and cycle time overrun errors are non fatal errors Refer to 4 8 Error Log below for details on the error log 106 Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 4 8 Error Log DM 2000 DM 2021 DM 2022 DM 2023 to DM 2019 DM 2020 DM 2021 The error log function registers the error code of any fatal or non fatal error that occurs in the PC The date and time at which the error occurred are registered along with the error code In CPM2C S PCs the error log is stored in DM 2000 through DM 2021 Up to 7 error records can be stored Error log pointer m Indicates the number of records stored in the log 0 to 7 Error log record 1 3 words used A 0 indicates no records Each error log record is configured as follows 15 8 7 0 Error code Sec Hour Error classification Min Day Leading word Leading word
111. 7 Hex 40 ms 08 Hex 80 ms 08 to 15 Input constant for IR 002 Setting same as for IR 001 DM 6622 00 to 07 Input constant for IR 003 Setting same as for IR 001 08 to 15 Input constant for IR 004 Setting same as for IR 001 DM 6623 00 to 07 Input constant for IR 005 Setting same as for IR 001 08 to 15 Input constant for IR 006 Setting same as for IR 001 DM 6624 00 to 07 Input constant for IR 007 Setting same as for IR 001 08 to 15 Input constant for IR 008 Setting same as for IR 001 DM 6625 00 to 07 Input constant for IR 009 Setting same as for IR 001 08 to 15 Not used DM 6626 to 00 to 15 Not used DM 6627 DM 6628 00 to 03 Function selection for input bit IR 00003 0 Hex Used as a normal input 1 Hex Used as an interrupt input including counter mode 2 Hex Used as a quick response input 04 to 07 Function selection for input bit IR 00004 Setting same as for IR 00003 08 to 15 Not used DM 6629 00 to 03 PV coordinate system for pulse output 0 0 Hex Relative coordinates 1 Hex Absolute coordinates 04 to 07 PV coordinate system for pulse output 1 0 Hex Relative coordinates 1 Hex Absolute coordinates 08 to 15 Not used DM 6630 to 00 to 15 Not used DM 6639 High speed Counter Settings DM 6640 to DM 6644 The following settings are read by the CPU when program execution is starte
112. 9 and DM 2022 to DM 2047 Error Log DM 2000 to DM 2021 HR area counter area SR 25511 SR 25512 if DM 6601 is set to hold I O memory at startup AR 23 operating mode if DM 6600 is set to use the previous operating mode and clock words AR 17 to AR 21 for CPU Units with clocks If the above words cannot be retained all data will be cleared except that AR 2114 will be turned ON The CPU Unit will start in PROGRAM mode if DM 6600 is set to use the previous operating mode If DM 6604 is set to generate an error the PC will start in PROGRAM mode regardless 15 CompoBus S ASIC Error Flag Turns ON if an error occurred AR 14 00 to 15 Maximum Cycle Time 4 digits BCD see note 3 The longest cycle time since the beginning of operation is stored It is not cleared when opera tion stops but it is cleared when operation starts again AR 15 00 to 15 Current Cycle Time 4 digits BCD see note 3 The most recent cycle time during operation is stored The Current Cycle Time is not cleared when operation stops AR 16 00 to 15 Not used AR 17 00 to 07 Minute 00 to 59 BCD Note 2 08 to 15 Hour 00 to 59 BCD AR 18 00 to 07 Second 00 to 59 BCD Note 2 08 to 15 Minute 00 to 59 BCD AR 19 00 to 07 Hour 00 to 23 BCD Note 2 08 to 15 Day of the Month 01 to 31 BCD AR 20 00 to 07 Month 01 to 12 BCD Note 2 08 to 15 Year 00 to 99 BCD 95 PC Setup Word s AR 21 Note 2 Bit s 00 to 07 Section 4
113. AC CPT WS01 CPTB1 E For IBM PC AT or compatible computers 3 5 disks 2HD and CD ROM SYSMAC Support C500 ZL3AT1 E 3 5 2HD for IBM PC AT compatible Software Maintenance Accessories Name Appearance Model Number Specifications Backup Battery CRA CPM2C BAT01 sag Expansion Memory Unit T CPM1 EMU01 V1 Uploads the ladder program and DM 6144 B to the PC bl to DM 6655 from the PC to the EEPROM and downloads the ladder program and DM 6144 to DM 6655 from the EEPROM EEPROM EEROM JD 256 Kbits 233 Standard Models Adapters and Connecting Cables Appendix A CPM2C S Name Appearance Model Commenis Cable communications number length port usage Peripheral RS 232C CQM1 CIFO2 For a 9 pin computer serial port 3 3m Adapter Peripheral CPM2C CIF01 Use for peripheral port to RS 232C RS 232C conversion Adapter Unit RS 232C RS 232C oe XW2Z 200S For a 25 pin computer serial port 2 m pate XW2Z 500S 5m i XW2Z 200S V For a 9 pin computer serial port ER XW2Z 500S V 5m RS 232C Cables XW2Z 070T 1 Use for CPM2C S RS 232C port to For use with the NT AL001 ae NT AL001 connection 70 cm cable a XW2Z 070T 1 Use for CPM2C S RS 232C port to NT ALO01 connection 2 m cable Adapters 1 N Connections Name RS 422 Adapter Appearance Model number NT ALO01 Specifications Use fo
114. ALOO1 Adapter is connected to the RS 232C port 77 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 10 No Protocol Communications The TXD 48 and RXD 47 instructions can be used in no protocol mode to ex change data with standard serial devices such as bar code readers and serial printers For example data can be received from a bar code reader or transmit ted to a serial printer The serial devices can be connected to the communications port as a RS 232C port or peripheral port just like a one to one computer connection See One to one Computer Connections on page 76 for diagrams showing the possible serial connections 3 4 11 OMRON PT Connections In a 1 1 NT Link a CPM2C S can be connected directly to a Programmable Ter minal The direct connection with a Programmable Terminal is possible by using the communications as a RS 232C port only not as a peripheral port A Programmable Terminal can also be connected by a Host Link connection Ei ther the RS 232C port or peripheral port connection can be used for the Host Link RS 232C port Connecting Cable D sub 9 pin gt XW2Z 200T 2 m a RS 232C CPM2C S CPU Unit XW2Z 500T 5 m a js port 3 JO a RS 232C connection i x OMRON Za CPM2C CN111 0 15 m Programmable Fag i Terminal 5 w aii J CS1W CN118 0 1 m RS 232C lt peripheral port RS 422 i S connection RS 232C port CPM2C CIF01 NT AL001 RS 232C Adapter A RS 232C port XW2Z 070T 1 0 7
115. CMOS on conversion interface without conversion CPM2C ClF11 Function Host Link no protocol 1 1 Link or 1 1 NT Link connections 3 Terminating Resistance Switch Set this switch to ON only for double ended connection to a Host Link net work This switch is factory set to OFF 4 RS 485 Interface Switch Swi ON OFF Used to switch to the RS 485 interface and to enable or disable RS CS con trol when performing RS 485 communications 49 Unit Components 50 Section 2 2 SW2 Status SW2 1 Rue SW2 1 OFF ON SW2 2 OFF 4 wire com Setting not munications possible ON Setting not 2 wire com possible munications SW2 Factory setting 1 OFF 2 OFF SW2 3 3 ON ae SW2 3 4 OFF OFF ON SW2 4 OFF Setting not Data can be possible received at any time ON RS control Setting not possible for possible CPU Unit Note Do not set both SW2 3 and SW2 4 to ON Doing so may result in damage to internal circuitry Set SW2 3 to OFF and SW2 4 to OFF when performing RS 485 2 wire communications 5 Connector Connects to the communications port on the CPU U nit RS 422 Interface Block Diagram TxD gt o RTS o CTS RxD C5V P an ie C5V oV 7 Swi gt o 6 P fe ov C5V o o 5V Y o lt Cov o SDB o SDA SECTION 3 Installation and Wiring Thi
116. Cycle Time Overrun Flag Turns ON when a cycle time overrun occurs i e when the cycle time exceeds 100 ms 10 11 Not used 12 Changing RS 232C Setup Flag Read Turns ON when the RS 232C port s settings are being changed write 13 Always ON Flag Read 14 Always OFF Flag only 15 First Cycle Flag Turns ON for 1 cycle at the start of operation SR 254 00 1 minute clock pulse 30 seconds ON 30 seconds OFF 01 0 02 second clock pulse 0 01 second ON 0 01 second OFF 02 Negative N Flag 03 Not used 04 Overflow OF Flag Read Turns ON when an overflow occurs in a signed binary calculation only 05 Underflow UF Flag Turns ON when an underflow occurs in a signed binary calculation 06 Differential Monitor Complete Flag Turns ON when differential monitoring is completed 07 STEP 08 Execution Flag Turns ON for 1 cycle only at the start of process based on STEP 08 08 to 15 Not used SR 255 00 0 1 second clock pulse 0 05 second ON 0 05 second OFF Read 01 0 2 second clock pulse 0 1 second ON 0 1 second OFF only 02 1 0 second clock pulse 0 5 second ON 0 5 second OFF 03 Instruction Execution Error ER Flag Turns ON when an error occurs during execution of an instruction 04 Carry CY Flag Turns ON when there is a carry in the results of an instruction execution 05 Greater Than GR Flag Turns ON when the result of a comparison operation is greater 06 Equals EQ Flag Turns ON when the result of a comparison oper
117. D 194 refer to the CS1 Series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 for CS1 series PCs and refer to the CVM1 CV Series 127 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 CV500 CV100 C V2000 CVM1 Programmable Controllers Operation Manual Ladder Diagrams W202 for CVM1 and CV series PCs Master s node number 63 Slave s network address 1 Slave s node number 2 Example Network Conditions CMND 194 Operand Details CMND S D C l gt e Command Words Contents Function Hex EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code 2801 Hex Slave node number 02 Hex WRITE BYTE DATA command service code 1E Hex Class ID 002F Hex Instance ID 0001 Hex specifies data area Starting write address 000A Hex specifies IR 010 Address L 0A Hex Address H 00 Hex These words contain the data to be written to slave words IR 010 to IR 029 When the WRITE BYTE DATA command is executed from an OMRON Master the bytes are written to the Slave in the same order HH LL in which they appear in the Master e Response Words The results are stored as follows 128 Word Contents Function Hex D 28 01 EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code 2801 Hex D 1 00 00 Normal completion code 0000 Hex D 2 0002 Number of bytes received 02 Hex indicates 2 bytes This is the number of bytes from D 3 to the end D 3 029C Slave s node number 02 Hex
118. DeviceNet is effective immediately and the output bits may go ON even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode Do not change the status of output bits from a Programming Device or DeviceNet unless it is safe to do so The program is executed in MONITOR mode and the following operations can be performed from a Programming Device In general MONITOR mode is used to debug the program test operation and make adjustments e Online editing e Monitoring I O memory during operation e Force setting force resetting I O bits changing set values and changing pres ent values during operation The program is executed at normal speed in RUN mode Operations such as online editing force setting force resetting I O bits and changing set values present values cannot be performed in RUN mode but the status of I O bits can be monitored 1 3 3 Operating Mode at Startup The operating mode of the CPM2C S when the power is turned ON depends upon the setting of pin 4 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPM2C S the PC Setup settings in DM 6600 and the Programming Console s mode switch set ting if a Programming Console is connected PC Setup setting Operating mode Word Bits Seiting DM 6600 08 to 15 00 Hex See note 1 01 Hex Startup mode is the same as the operating mode before power was interrupted 02 Hex Startup mode is determined by bits 00 to 07 00 to 07 00 Hex PROGRAM mode 01 Hex MONITOR mode
119. E ALARM FALS 07 1 2 3 MESSAGE MSG 46 206 There are three instructions that can be used to define errors or messages FAL 06 causes a non fatal error FAL 07 causes a fatal error and MSG 46 sends a message to the Programming Console or host computer connected to the PC FAL 06 is an instruction that causes a non fatal error The following will occur when an FAL 06 instruction is executed 1 The ERR ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash PC operation will con tinue 2 The instruction s 2 digit BCD FAL number 01 to 99 will be written to SR 25300 to SR 25307 The FAL numbers can be set arbitrarily to indicate particular conditions but the same number should not be used as both an FAL number and an FALS number To clear an FAL error correct the cause of the error and then execute FAL 00 or use a Programming Device to clear the error FALS 07 is an instruction that causes a fatal error The following will occur when an FALS 07 instruction is executed 1 Program execution will be stopped and all outputs will be turned OFF 2 The ERR ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will be lit 3 The instruction s 2 digit BCD FALS number 01 to 99 will be written to SR 25300 to SR 25307 The FALS numbers can be set arbitrarily to indicate particular conditions but the same number should not be used as both an FAL number and an FALS number To clear an FALS error use a Programming Device to switch the PC to
120. E OVER error is generated SR 25309 will turn ON 120 ms or longer The FALS 9F monitoring time SV is exceeded A system error FALS 9F is generated and opera tion stops 200 ms or longer Programming using the 0 2 second Clock Bit SR 25501 may be inaccurate 7 1 3 Cycle Time Example In this example the cycle time is calculated for a Unit The I O is configured as follows 6 inputs 1 word 00000 to 00005 4 outputs 1 word 01000 to 01003 The rest of the operating conditions are assumed to be as follows User s program 500 instructions consists of only LD and OUT Cycle time Variable no minimum set The average processing time for a single instruction in the user s program is as sumed to be 1 26 us The cycle times are as shown in the following table Calculation method Time when peripheral Time when peripheral port is used port is not used 1 Overseeing 25 0 3 ms 0 3 ms 2 Wait for completion of CompoBus S 0 0 5 ms communications 3 CompoBus S input refreshing 0 02 ms 0 02 ms 4 Program execution 1 26 x 500 us 0 6 ms 0 6 ms 5 Cycle time calculation 0 0 6 CompoBus S output refreshing 0 05 ms 0 05 ms 7 I O refreshing ae 0 06 ms 0 06 ms 8 DeviceNet I O refreshing 0 1 ms 0 1 ms 9 Peripheral port servicing ean 0 55 ms 0 10 RS 232C port servicing 0 0 11 DeviceNet communications servicing 0 0 1 68 ms
121. EEPROM EEPROM DM6144 to 6655 Not affected Note Use a Phillips screwdriver or other tool with a diameter of 3 0 mm max and a blade length of 10 mm min to press the upload button ie ae sp 3 0 dia max Uploading is possible even if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode 226 Handling Section 10 3 Operation Procedure Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1 EMU01 V1 Connect the CPM1 EMU01 V1 to the PC s communications port peripheral port After 2 or 3 s check if the indicator is lit green See the note on the right Yes Select the memory area to be uploaded Upload only the ladder DM 6655 program Press the UPLOAD DM Press the UPLOAD But Button ton Check if the indicator is blinking green indicating that uploading has started ao No Yes Upload both the ladder program and DM 6144 to Check if the indicator is lit green in dicating that uploading has been suc cessfully completed Yes Remove the Expansion Memory Unit from the PC poo eo ee ee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1 EMU01 V1 before connecting to the PC i Check the orientation of the connector before connecting the CPM1 EMU01 V1 i Note If the indicator is not lit at all lit red or blinks red uploading will not be pos sible In this case check the follow ing items els the connector properly con nected i e Is the EEPROM p
122. Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 Response Format EES Additional error code Always FF General error code Source node number Number of bytes received Parameters Number of bytes received response Indicates the number of bytes of data in hexadecimal from the source node number Source node number response Indicates the node number in hexadecimal of the CPM2C S that returned the response General error code response Indicates the nature of the error with one of the 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal error codes listed in the following table Error name Meaning Service not supported The service code was invalid Too much data There was too much data For example the amount of write data exceeded the data area boundary Not enough data There was too little data For example an odd number of bytes of write data were used in a WRITE WORD DATA command Invalid parameter The starting word address was invalid Reply data too large The data area boundary was exceeded in a DATA READ command Object does not exist The class ID or instance ID was invalid Additional error code response Always FF Hex 6 3 3 Examples of DeviceNet Explicit Messages CS1 CVM1 and CV series PCs Reading Data with CMND 194 Example Network Conditions 126 This example shows the instruction operands and results when 20 words of data IR 010 to IRO29 in a Slave are r
123. FF and the Peripheral Port Communications Error Flag AR 0812 will be ON Check the cables and restart communications 205 Self diagnostic Functions Section 9 2 Error Messages Error Flags Error Code N WARNING N WARNING When an error is detected a corresponding error message will be displayed on the Programming Console or other Programming Device connected to the PC When a hardware error is detected the corresponding error flag in the AR or SR area will be turned ON When an error is detected a specific 2 digit hexadecimal error code is output to SR 25300 to SR 25307 The error code and time of occurrence are also output to the Error Log Area DM 2000 to DM 2021 Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits i e not in the Programmable Controller to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC operation Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious accidents The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm FALS instruction is executed External safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious accidents 9 2 2 User defined Errors FAILURE ALARM FAL 06 1 2 3 SEVERE FAILUR
124. I O refreshing Program execution and other processes I O refreshing i 15 ms Output ON delay 15 ms Output point _ T Min I O response time 10 15 15 40 ms Maximum I O Response Time The CPM2C S takes longest to respond when it receives the input signal just after the input refresh phase of the cycle as shown in the illustration below In that case a delay of approximately one cycle will occur Input point Input ON delay 10 ms Input bit Program execution Program execution Vo refreshing and other processes I O refreshing and other processes I O refreshing 15 ms 15 ms Output ON delay 15 ms Output _ point a i I O response time 10 15 x 2 15 55 ms 149 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 7 2 2 I O Response Time between CompoBus S Slaves The I O response time between CompoBus S Slaves depends on the cycle time and I O timing cpmec s Jf CompoBus S transmission line CompoBus S Slave Minimum I O Response Time The minimum I O response time is the CPM2C S program execution time plus the cycle time calculation time CompoBus S CompoBus S input refreshing output refreshing CPM2C S cycle CompoBus S ompoBus CompoBus S communications fous communica i sommt processing fons tim tions time Input delay Slave input Slave output Output delay Maximum I O Response Time The maximum I O respons
125. IM CNT 000 to 255 TIM CNT 000 to 511 area TIM CNT 256 to 511 cannot be used DM Read write DM 0000 to DM 1999 DM 0000 to DM 6143 area DM 2022 to DM 2047 DM 2048 to DM 6143 cannot be used Read only DM 6144 to DM 6599 Error Log DM 2000 to DM 2021 DM 6144 to DM 6568 DM 6569 to DM 6599 DM 6600 to DM 6655 PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 Since the PC model is set to CQM1 a program that will run properly in the CQM1 will pass the program check even if it won t run properly in the CPM2C S An error message will be displayed and the values will not be accepted if a data area address that exceeds the range of a CPM2C S data area is entered for monitoring an instruction operand or a timer counter SV SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 8 1 Available Program Memory Program Transfer Expansion Instructions The program capacity of the CQM1 7 200 words is greater than that of the CPM2C S 4 096 words and so the display will show more free space than is actually available Be sure to keep the actual program capacity in mind while programming When the program is transferred from the PC to the CPT with the default function code assignments FUN18 FUN19 FUN87 and FUN88 will be displayed as TKY MCMP DSW and 7SEG The instructions however will be transferred correctly An error will occur if any instructions not supported by the CPT are transferred from the CPM2C S When
126. Input and Program Check Monitoring Online Editing and Set Values 156 When programming a CPM2C S PC with the SYSMAC CPT Support Software set the PC model to CQM1 and the CPU model to CPU43 There are some software limitations because of differences between the CPM2C S and CQM1 CPU43 CPUs CQM1 data areas are larger than the corresponding CPM2C S data areas so the data area addresses that don t actually exist in the CPM2C S or instructions not supported by the CPM2C S can be input and won t be detected in the pro gram check Be sure that the word and bit addresses are within the specified ranges and that all instructions are supported If a program contains a data area address that exceeds the range of a CPM2C S data area a memory error will be generated when the program is executed and the Memory Area Specification Error Flag AR 1308 will be turned ON Data area CPM2C S range CQM1 range Input words IR 000 to IR 009 IR 000 to IR 011 Output words IR 010 to IR 019 IR 100 to IR 111 Work words and IR 020 to IR 049 IR 200 to IR 227 IR 012 to IR 099 CompoBus S I O IR 050 to IR 199 cannot be used IR 112 to IR 227 areas SR area SR 228 to SR 255 SR 228 to SR 255 HR area HR 00 to HR 19 HR 00 to HR 99 HR 20 to HR 99 cannot be used AR area AR 00 to AR 23 AR 00 to AR 27 AR 24 to AR 27 cannot be used LR area LR 00 to LR 15 LR 00 to LR 63 LR 16 to LR 63 cannot be used Timer Counter T
127. Internal battery backup 2 year life time at 25 C replaceable CPU Unit with clock Internal battery backup 2 year lifetime at 25 C replaceable CPU Unit without clock Capacitor backup 10 day backup at 25 C or optional battery backup 2 years at 25 C replaceable CompoBus S Master Functions Up to 32 Slaves can be connected and up to 256 I O points can be controlled DeviceNet Slave Functions DeviceNet Remote I O Link Use up to 1 024 I O points in the I O Link Explicit Message Communications Any PC data area can be accessed from the Master Interrupt inputs interrupt input mode 2 4 20 point CPU Unit 2 10 point CPU Unit Interrupt inputs counter mode Counter mode Incrementing counter Decrementing counter Incrementing counter Decrementing counter Counter upper limit 2 kHz 2 kHz SR 244 to SR 247 Contains counter PV Contains counter PV Method s to read counter PV Read SR 244 to SR 247 Execute PRV 62 Read SR 244 to SR 247 Execute PRV 62 Method to change counter PV Execute INI 61 Execute INI 61 Interval timer One shot mode Yes Yes Scheduled interrupt mode Yes Yes 26 Comparison with the CPM2C CPM2C S Section 1 5 CPM2C CPM2A Quick response Setting the quick response inputs function PC Setup PC Setup INT 89 Mask Not supported ignored Not supporte
128. K to switch to MONITOR mode J 2S Soe ae ee a i 162 SYSMAC Support Software SSS Section 8 2 Starting Operation in RUN Mode Use the following procedure to switch the CPM2C S to RUN mode 1 2 3 1 Make sure that the SYSMAC CPT Support Software is online Select On line Q from the menu bar select Mode M and then RUN R 2 A confirmation message will be displayed Click OK to switch to RUN mode SSS Fd Dk m heap FO mah a fat 8 2 SYSMAC Support Software SSS 8 2 1 Introduction The SSS is a complete programming and control package designed for C series and CVM1 PCs It provides not only programming capabilities but also advanced debugging monitoring and program data management For further information and actual operating procedures please refer to the SYSMAC Sup port Software Operation Manuals Basics and C Series CPM2C S programming can be performed with any version of the SSS Refer to 3 4 9 Programming Device Connections for details on connecting a personal computer to the CPM2C S 8 2 2 Limitations and Precautions When programming a CPM2C S PC with the SSS set the PC model to CQM1 There are some software limitations because of differences between the CPM2C S and CQM1 CPUs cami lt gt Bysten setup K PC mode CCUMI C a CVM1 CPU21 C PC interface Com1 Periph B CUM1 CPUA1 N Netuork address Net 00 C CUMI CPUOL RK1 Q C200QH
129. MONITOR gt or lt RUN gt will appear on the Programming Console screen e No key operations can be performed while the mode display is displayed on the Programming Console screen Press CLR to clear the display so that key operations can be performed e If the SHIFT Key is pressed while the mode switch is turned the original dis play will remain on the Programming Console s screen and the mode display won t appear 169 Using a Programming Console Section 8 3 MONITOR RUN PROGRAM 7 N Mode display e The CPM2C S will enter RUN mode automatically if a Programming Console isn t connected when the CPM2C S is turned on MONITOR MONITOR RUN PROGRAM RUN PROGRAM N 7 N 7 Operation Initial display Operating Modes N Caution Z N Caution Startup Operating Mode Operation SHIFT CLR PROGRAM Mode The CPM2C S program isn t executed in PROGRAM mode Use PROGRAM mode to create and edit the program clear memory or check the program for errors MONITOR Mode The CPM2C S program is executed in MONITOR mode and I O is processed just as it is in RUN mode Use MONITOR mode to test system operations such as monitoring CPM2C S operating status force setting and resetting I O bits changing the SV PV of timers and counters changing word data and online editing RUN Mode This is the CPM2C S
130. Net communications is indicated on the CPM2C S PC s Indicator Status Lit LED indicators Function Normal status Meaning Normal status Flashing Incomplete settings status Reading switch settings Lit Fatal error Hardware error watchdog timer error Flashing Non fatal error Error such as incorrect switch settings Not lit Power is not being supplied e Power is not being supplied e Waiting for initialization to start e Reset in progress 132 Lit Online Communications established Normal network status when communications have been established Flashing Online Communications not established Normal network status when communications haven t been established Lit Fatal communications error Communications error The Unit detected an error indicating that network communications are disabled e Node number duplication e Bus off error detected Flashing Non fatal communications error Communications timeout Not lit Offline Power supply OFF Waiting for completion of the node number duplication check in the Master e Incorrect switch settings e Power supply OFF Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 6 4 2 AR Area Flags indicating DeviceNet Status The following status information is output to flags in the AR area Word Bit s Function AR 00 00 DeviceNet switch settings error ON
131. ON An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup DM 6645 to DM 6655 during operation Correct the settings and clear the error SCAN TIME OVER F8 The cycle time has exceeded 100 ms SR 25309 will be ON This indicates that the program cycle time is longer than recommended Reduce cycle time if possible The CPM2C S can be set so that this error won t be detected CompoBus S None An error has occurred in CompoBus S communications oa Restart after checking slaves and communications paths no message RS 232C None An error has occurred in communications between the RS 232C port or the peripheral port peripheral port port and peripheral devices communications DERN error Restart after checking communications paths Battery error F7 If the Low Battery Detection Switch is ON and the voltage of the CPM2C BAT01 no message backup battery is below the minimum level the ERR ALM indicator will flash and SR 25308 will be turned ON See page 44 for details on the Low Battery Detection Switch Replace the battery See 9 7 Battery Replacement for details 207 Programming Console Operation Errors Section 9 3 9 2 4 Fatal Errors PC operation and program execution will stop and all outputs from the PC will be turned OFF when any of these errors have occurred CPM2C S operation can t be restarted until the PC is turned OFF and then ON again or a Programming Device is used to switch the PC to PROGRAM mode and clear the fata
132. PM2C S Test Run Procedure 204 1 2 3 1 Power Supply Application a Check the CPM2C S power supply voltage and terminal connections b Check the I O devices power supply voltage and terminal connections c Turn ON the power supply and check that the PWR indicator lights d Use a Programming Device to set the CPM2C S to PROGRAM mode Self diagnostic Functions Section 9 2 2 I O Wiring Checks a With the CPM2C S in PROGRAM mode check the output wiring by turn ing ON the output bits with the force set and force reset operations Refer to 8 4 24 Force Set Reset for details b Check the input wiring with the CPM2C S input indicators or a Program ming Device s monitor operations 3 Test Run a Use a Programming Device to set the CPM2C S to RUN or MONITOR mode and check that the RUN indicator lights b Check the sequence of operation with the force set reset operations etc 4 Debugging Correct any programming errors that are detected 5 Saving the Program a Use a Programming Device to write the program to a backup floppy disk b Print out a hard copy of the program with a printer Note Refer to Section 8 Using Programming Devices for details on the Support Soft ware and Programming Console operations 9 2 Self diagnostic Functions The CPM2C S is equipped with a variety of self diagnostic functions to help identify and correct errors and reduce down time 9 2 1 Identifying Errors An er
133. Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the program 8 4 7 Entering or Editing Programs 176 This operation is used enter or edit programs It is possible in PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM The same procedure is used to either input a program for the first time or to change a program that already exists In either case the current contents of Program Memory is overwritten Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 00002 The program shown in the following diagram will be entered to demonstrate this operation 1 2 3 4 Input the first instruction and operand wo Adaress Iatuction operanas 0123 123s 00200 IR 00002 00201 M o 0123 MOV 021 ADB 050 b E 0100 ee 10 ADB 050 Ooo 0100 e ar FFC Pb 00007 DM 0000 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Specify the address where the program will begin 3 Input the address where the program will begin and press the Down Arrow Key It is not necessary to input leading zeroes aroa LD C par 5 Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory The next program address will be displayed WRITE If a mistake was made inputting the instruction press the Up Arrow Key to return to the previous program address and input the instruction again The mistaken instruction will be overwritten To specify the Completion Flag
134. Program memory 0 Hex Not write protected 1 Hex Write protected Default English displays not write protected Note DM 6602 itself can still be changed after the program memory has been write protected by setting bits 04 to 07 of DM 6602 to 1 103 PC Setup Section 4 6 4 7 4 RS 232C Port Servicing Time The following settings are used to determine the percentage of the cycle time devoted to servicing the RS 232C port Bit 15 0 DM6616 E Servicing time setting enable 00 Hex Disabled 5 used 01 Hex Enabled setting in bits 00 to 07 used Servicing time valid with bits 08 to 15 are 01 00 to 99 BCD two digits Default 5 of cycle time For example if DM 6616 is set to 0110 the RS 232C port will be serviced for 10 of the cycle time The servicing time will be 0 34 ms minimum The entire servicing time will not be used unless processing requests exist 4 7 5 Peripheral Port Servicing Time The following settings are used to determine the percentage of the cycle time devoted to servicing the peripheral port Bit 15 0 DM6617 Ki Servicing time setting enable 00 Hex Disabled 5 used 01 Hex Enabled setting in bits 00 to 07 used Servicing time valid with bits 08 to 15 are 01 00 to 99 BCD two digits Default 5 of cycle time For example if DM 6617 is set to 0115 the peripheral port will be serviced for 15 of the cycle time Th
135. Programming Console s mode switch to MONITOR mode MONITOR 3 Force set the start input bit IR 00000 from the Programming Console to start the program 200 Programming Example Section 8 5 The cursor in the lower left corner of the display indicates that the force set is in progress The bit will remain ON as long as the Set Key is held down 4 The output indicator for output IR 01000 will flash ten times if the program is operating correctly The indicator should go OFF after ten one second flashes There is a mistake in the program if the output indicator doesn t flash In this case check the program and force set reset bits to check operation 201 SECTION 9 Test Runs and Error Processing This section describes procedures for test runs of CPM2C S operation self diagnosis functions and error processing to iden tify and correct the hardware and software errors that can occur during PC operation 9 1 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure 0 0 00 cece ee ee eee 9 1 1 Initial System Checks 0 0 eee eee 9 1 2 Flash Memory Precautions 0 0 cece eee ee 9 1 3 CPM2C S Test Run Procedure 0 0 0 cece eee eee 9 2 Self diagnostic Functions isse a a cece eee eee 9 2 1 Identifying Errors 63 35 cag st 8 deb edt REE SES RAR RR ER AOS OEE ES SES 9 2 2 User defined Errors ee eccessi tendrem OAS es Se A pe eee ee 9 2 3
136. Pulse outputs can be used with transistor outputs only they cannot be used with relay outputs Synchronized pulse control 1 point A pulse output can be created by combining the high speed counter with pulse outputs and multiplying the frequency of the input pulses from the high speed counter by a fixed factor This output is possible with transistor outputs only it cannot be used with relay outputs Quick response inputs 2 inputs Shared by the external interrupt inputs and the interrupt inputs counter mode Min input pulse width 50 us max Input time constant ON response time OFF response time Can be set for all input points 1 ms 2 ms 3 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 40 ms or 80 ms Clock function Shows the year month day of the week day hour minute and second Battery backup Communications functions A Connecting Cable CPM2C CN111 CS1W CN114 or CS1W CN118 or Adapter Unit CPM2C CIF01 or CPM2C CIF11 is required to connect to the CPM2C S communications port The communications port can be used as both a peripheral and RS 232C port Peripheral port Supports Host Link peripheral bus no protocol or Programming Console connections RS 232C port Supports Host Link no protocol 1 1 Slave Unit Link 1 1 Master Unit Link or 1 1 NT Link connections Memory protection See notes 1 and 2 HR area AR area program contents read write DM area contents and counter values mai
137. QM1H PROO1 E Programming Console can be connected di rectly to the CPM2C S CPU Unit 46 Unit Components Section 2 2 b The C200H PRO27 E Programming Console can be connected directly to the CPM2C S CPU Unit using a special connecting cable CS1W CN224 624 c Use the CS1W CN114 when using the port as a peripheral port d Use the CS1W CN118 when using the port as a RS 232C port 2 RS 232C Port Used to connect to the RS 232C interface of a personal computer or Pro grammable Terminal operator interface Connector Pin Allocation O 5CTS 8 NC 3 RxD 65V F D O Internal Configuration e CIES CPM2C S CPU Unit CMOS level gt RS 232C conversion Peripheral port CMOS level Peripheral port CMOS RS 232C RS 232C port RS 232C RS 232C port D sub connector Peripheral port Signal Outputs signals from the CPU Unit s CMOS on conversion interface without conversion or converts CMOS CPM2C CIF01 level CPU Unit side to RS 232C connected device side Function Host Link peripheral bus no protocol or Programming Console connections RS 232C port Signal Outputs signals from the CPU Units CMOS conversion interface without conversion Function Host Link no protocol 1 1 Link or 1 1 NT Link connections on CPM2C CIF01 3 Connector Connects to the communications port on the CPU Unit 47 Unit Components Section 2 2 2 2 5 CPM2C CIF11 RS 422 RS
138. R 1302 indicate the part of the PC Setup where the error is located The default setting usually 0000 is used instead of the in correct setting Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 4 6 2 PC Setup Settings Word s Bit s Function PC Startup Processing DM 6600 to DM 6614 The following settings are read by the CPU when the PC is turned ON DM 6600 00 to 07 Startup mode effective when bits 08 to 15 are set to 02 00 Hex PROGRAM 01 Hex MONITOR 02 Hex RUN 08 to 15 Startup mode designation 00 Hex According to the setting on DIP switch pin 4 and peripheral port connection See table at the bottom of this page 01 Hex Continue operating mode last used before power was turned OFF 02 Hex Use setting in bits 00 to 07 DM 6601 00 to 07 Not used 08 to 11 IOM Hold Bit SR 25212 Status at Startup 0 Hex Reset to 0 1 Hex Maintain previous status 12to15 Forced Status Hold Bit SR 25211 Status at Startup 0 Hex Reset to 0 1 Hex Maintain previous status DM 6602 00 to 03 Program memory write protection 0 Hex Program memory unprotected 1 Hex Program memory write protected except DM 6602 itself 04 to 07 Programming Console display language 0 Hex English 1 Hex Japanese 08 to 11 Expansion instruction function code assignments 0 Hex Default settings 1 Hex User assignments 12 to 15 Not used DM
139. S input current mA Ec CPM2C S OFF voltage V 5 0 V La x 5 0 ies oan 23 Wmi STX L50 WwW W min kQ max R The equations above were derived from the following equations Input voltage 24 Input current lo R W2 Input voltage 24 lt Input voltage 24 OFF voltage E 5 0 Input current lo R x Input voltage 24 x tolerance 4 Refer tp 3 1 3 I O Specifications for details on the values L Ic and Ec The input impedance input current and OFF voltage may vary depending on the input being used IN00000 through IN00002 have different values 70 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Inductive Loads When connecting an inductive load to an input connect a diode in parallel with the load The diode should satisfy the following requirements 1 2 3 1 Peak reverse breakdown voltage must be at least 3 times the load voltage 2 Average rectified current must be 1 A Using Pulse Outputs The following diagrams show example applications of sink type transistor out puts using output bits IR 01000 and IR 01001 Use the PULS 65 SPED ACC PWM and SYNC instructions to produce pulse outputs rath er than normal outputs from output bits IR 01000 and IR 01001 Single phase pulse output Single phase pulse output Fixed duty ratio Variable duty ratio CPM2C S CPM2C S Relay Motor driver Pulse output 0 Pulse output 0 01000
140. S Features and Functions 0 0 00 eee Talt cCPM2C S Featires cesaretin tie babes ee okey Skee SNEED ERRE SR EEE 1 1 2 Overview of CPM2C S Functions 0 0 00 eee eee eee 1 2 System Configurations 0 0 cee cece ete eee 1 2 1 CPU Units and AC Power Supply Units 0 0 00000 1 2 2 CompoBus S Interface 00 ete ene 1 2 3 CPU Unit Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units 1 2 4 DeviceNet Interface ni sends eee pbs ee etant pee dace net dated a 1 2 5 Adapter Unit 2c 8 cs eee kg Fe AA i eae eeu aw Sistas BRE og wba 1 3 CPM2C S Structure and Operation 0 0 cece eee 123 1 CPRM2C S Structure s 25 5 63 bee ide A a ee ee 1 3 2 Operating Modes scarsia ef etd a dd eee ak Sous bw Bs Sema goog Le ees 1 3 3 Operating Mode at Startup 00 0 ee eee eee ee 1 3 4 PC Operation at Startup 2 0 eee eee 1 3 5 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts 00 0 1 4 Functions Listed by Usage 0 cence eee 1 5 Comparison with the CPM2C 0 ccc eee eae 1 6 Preparation for Operation 0 0c cee cence eee System Configurations Section 1 2 1 1 CPM2C S Features and Functions 1 1 1 CPM2C S Features The CPM2C S PCs are compact CPM2C PCs that have been equipped with the functions of a CompoBus S Master The CPM2C S incorporates a variety of special features just like the CPM2C including synchronized pulse control in terrupt inputs
141. TA Writes data from the DeviceNet Master to the specified node s data area in byte units When word data is being written the leftmost byte is written before the rightmost byte Up to 200 bytes can be written at one time Command Format ee TTT IT TL Class Address mie Leftmost byte Service code Instance ID Address H Rightmost byte Rightmost byte Destination node number Write data 200 bytes max Service code Response Format Source node number Number of bytes received Parameters Destination node number command Specify the node number of the CPM2C S where the data will be written Specify the node number in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal Service code command response Specify 1E Hex in the command The leftmost bit of the service code is turned ON in the response so 9E Hex is returned Class ID command Always 2F Hex Instance ID command Specify the data area where data will be written Specify one of the codes listed in the following table in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal Area name Address range IR area IR 000 to IR 049 IR area IR 200 to IR 227 DM area DM 0000 to DM 2047 LR area LR 00 to LR 15 HR area HR 00 to HR 19 Timer Counter area TC 000 to TC 255 Address L and Address H command Specify the starting word address where data will be written Specify the address in hexadecimal as follows Address L The rightmost two digits of the 4 digit starting a
142. TR area TROto TR7 These bits are used to temporarily store 8 bits ON OFF status at program branches HR area HR 00 to HR 19 HR 0000 to HR 1915 These bits store data and retain their ON 20 words 320 bits OFF status when power is turned OFF or operation starts or stops They are used in the same way as work bits AR area AR 00 to AR 23 AR 0000 to AR 2315 These bits serve specific functions such as 24 words 384 bits flags and control bits LR area LR 00 to LR 15 LR 0000 to LR 1515 Used for a 1 1 PC Link with another PC 16 words 256 bits Timer Counter area TC 000 to TC 255 timer counter numbers Timers and counters use the TIM TIMH 15 CNT CNTR 12 TMHH and TIML instructions The same numbers are used for both timers and counters 82 Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 Data area Words Bits Function DM Read write DM 0000 to DM 1999 DM area data can be accessed in word area DM 2022 to DM 2047 units only Word values are retained when 2 026 words the power is turned off or operation started or stopped Read write areas can be read and written freely within the program Error log DM 2000 to DM 2021 Used to store the time of occurrence and 22 words error code of errors that occur These words can be used as ordinary read write DM when the error log function isn t being used Read only DM 6144 to DM 6599 Cannot be
143. User Manual Actual SSS operating procedures are provided in the SSS Operation Manuals Basics and C series PCs Operations for the WS02 CXPC1 E CX Programmer are provided in the WS02 CXPCI E CX Programmer User Manual W361 and the CX Server User Manual W362 Refer to 3 4 9 Programming Device Connections and 8 3 1 Connecting the Programming Console for details on connecting a Programming Console or personal computer to the CPM2C S 8 1 SYSMAC CPT Support Software 0 eect e ee 8 1 1 Introduction sssini ee SR ee SR a ea SS ee E eA SS Bees 8 1 2 Limitations and Precautions 0 0 eee eee ee eee 8 1 3 Using the SYSMAC CPT Support Software 000000008 8 2 SYSMAC Support Software SSS 1 0 0 ce cece B22 1e AMOMUCHON i ee cbanee gees dt ate Gace oa Stee wen ace eet pele te 8 2 2 Limitations and Precautions 0 00 eee eee cece 8 3 Using a Programming Console 0 0 00 c eee ee eens 8 3 1 Connecting the Programming Console 0 0 0 0c eee eee eee 8 3 2 Compatible Programming Consoles 0 0 c eee eee eee 8 3 3 Changing the CPM2C S Mode with the Mode Switch 8 3 4 Preparation for Operation 0 0 eee eee eee 8 3 5 Entering the Password soseer enren eoret senp eects 8 4 Programming Console Operations 0 0 0 rernu rr errereen Sl VOVERVIEW 440 cs dos eae E E Bee ee Cie BES Oe Pi 8 422 Clearing Memory 3 2 08 sts
144. a word constant to FIFO stack 32 0 When setting a word word to FIFO stack 784 7 When seitinga DM DM to FIFO stack via DM 33 6 When setting a word constant to LIFO stack 34 0 When setting a word word to LIFO stack 57 1 When seittinga DM DM to LIFO stack via DM 82 MOVB 17 3 When transferring a constant to a word 2 6 18 0 When transferring from one word to another 41 7 When transferring DMto DM 83 MOVD 13 8 When transferring a constant to a word 2 6 16 2 When transferring from one word to another 38 1 When transferring DMto DM 84 SFTR 22 8 Shifting 1 word 2 6 24 3 Shifting 10 words 1 15 ms Shifting 2 048 words using DM 85 TCMP 27 5 Comparing constant to word set table 2 6 28 0 Comparing word to word set table 48 3 Comparing DMto DM set table 86 ASC 19 1 Word word 2 6 52 2 DM gt DM 89 INT 22 1 Set masks via word 2 6 30 1 Set masks via DM 18 4 Clear interrupts via word 26 4 Clear interrupts via DM 17 2 Read mask status via word 24 1 Read mask status via DM 23 1 Change counter SV via word 31 1 Change counter SV via DM 10 7 Mask all interrupts via word 10 7 Mask all interrupts via DM 11 0 Clear all interrupts via word 11 0 Clear all interrupts via DM 91 SBS 10 8 Any 2 6 92 SBN 0 76 93 RET 6 2 1 0 97 IORF 16 8 Refreshing IR 000 2 8 130 7 Refreshing one input word 110 7 Refreshing one output word 99 MCRO 26 1 With word set I O operands 2 6 42 3 With DM set I O operands
145. al cycle time is 2 59 s the current cycle time stored in the AR area will be 2590 ms but the cycle time read from a Programming Device will be 999 9 ms A cycle time over error non fatal will be generated when the cycle time ex ceeds 100 ms unless detection of long cycle times is disabled using the setting in DM 6655 4 7 7 Minimum Cycle Time Make the settings shown below to standardize the cycle time and to eliminate variations in I O response time by setting a minimum cycle time Bit 15 0 DMesi9 ey Cycle time 4 digits BCD 0000 Cycle time variable 0001 to 9999 Minimum cycle time Unit 1 ms Default Cycle time variable If the actual cycle time is shorter than the minimum cycle time execution will wait until the minimum time has expired If the actual cycle time is longer than the minimum cycle time then operation will proceed according to the actual cycle time AR 2405 will turn ON if the minimum cycle time is exceeded 4 7 8 Input Time Constants Make the settings shown below to set the time from when the actual inputs from the DC Input Unit are turned ON or OFF until the corresponding input bits are updated i e until their ON OFF status is changed Make these settings when you want to adjust the time until inputs stabilize Increasing the input time constant can reduce the effects from chattering and external noise Input from an input device i i such as a limit switch p
146. amming Console This program makes output IR 01000 flicker ON OFF one second ON one second OFF ten times after input IR 00000 is turned ON 196 Start input 00000 C000 00000 20000 20000 T002 00004 20000 T002 00007 20000 T001 m 00010 00014 00017 Count input Reset input CP 20000 TIM 001 0010 Self holding bit 1 second timer IM 002 0020 2 second timer CNT 000 0010 20000 T001 01000 10 count counter Flicker output 10 counts ON OFF The mnemonic list for the example program is shown in the following table The steps required to enter this program from a Programming Console are described in 8 5 3 Programming Procedures Address Instruction Data Programming example procedures in 8 5 3 Programming Procedures 00000 LD 00000 1 Self holding bit 00001 OR 20000 00002 AND NOT 000 00003 OUT 20000 00004 LD 20000 2 1 second timer 00005 AND NOT 002 00006 TIM 001 0010 00007 LD 20000 3 2 second timer 00008 AND NOT 002 00009 TIM 002 0020 00010 LD 20000 4 10 count counter 00011 AND 001 00012 LD NOT 20000 00013 CNT 000 0010 00014 LD 20000 5 Flicker output 10 counts 00015 AND NOT 001 00016 OUT 01000 00017 END 01 6 END 01 instruction Programming Example Section 8 5 8 5 3 Programming Procedures The example program will be writte
147. an error in DM 6600 to DM 6614 the part of the PC Setup area that is read at power up 01 Start up PC Setup Error Flag Turns ON when there is an error in DM 6615 to DM 6644 the part of the PC Setup area that is read at the beginning of operation 02 RUN PC Setup Error Flag Turns ON when there is an error in DM 6645 to DM 6655 the part of the PC Setup area that is always read 03 04 Not used 05 Cycle Time Too Long Flag Turns ON if the actual cycle time is longer than the cycle time set in DM 6619 06 07 Not used 08 Memory Area Specification Error Flag Turns ON when a non existent data area address is specified in the program 09 Flash Memory Error Flag Turns ON when there is an error in flash memory 10 Read only DM Error Flag Turns ON when a checksum error occurs in the read only DM DM 6144 to DM 6599 and that area is initialized 11 PC Setup Error Flag Turns ON when a checksum error occurs in the PC Setup area 12 Program Error Flag Turns ON when a checksum error occurs in the program memory UM area or when an im proper instruction is executed 13 Expansion Instruction Area Error Flag Turns ON when a checksum error occurs in the expansion instruction assignments area The expansion instruction assignments will be cleared to their default settings 14 Data Save Error Flag Turns ON if data could not be retained with the backup battery The following words are normally backed up by the battery DM read write words DM 0000 to DM 199
148. and DeviceNet Slave Functions 4 sourcing transistor outputs CPM2C S110C DRT System Configurations Section 1 2 AC Power Supply Unit Optional AC Power Supply Unit Note General purpose power supplies such as the S82J series and S82K series Power Supplies can also be used 1 2 2 CompoBus S Interface The standard built in CompoBus S interface increases the PC s I O capacity re duces wiring and saves space Up to 32 CompoBus S Slaves can be connected to create a Remote I O Link with up to 256 I O points It is easy to build an effi cient long range distributed system with less wiring by connecting Compo Bus S I O Terminals Analog Terminals Sensor Terminals and Bit Chain Termi nals CPMet S CompoBus S transmission line Se a Terminator 32 or 16 Slaves max selectable SoS e The max number of Slaves that can be connected through CompoBus S can be set to 16 or 32 Slaves The following tables show how the max number of Slaves and communications mode settings affect the communications re sponse time as well as the communications distance and communications speed 10 System Configurations Section 1 2 CompoBus S Communications Response Time Communications mode Max number of Slaves Communications response time High speed mode 16 0 5 ms 32 0 8 ms Long distance mode 16 4 0 ms 32 6 0 ms Communications Distance e When VCIT Cable is used Tru
149. and then press the WRITE Key Deletion Follow the procedure below to delete the IR 00103 NO condition at address 00205 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the address where the NO condition will be deleted and press the Down Arrow Key It is not necessary to input leading zeroes ICS 3 Press the DEL Key 4 Press the Up Arrow Key to delete the specified instruction If the instruction has more operands the operands will be deleted automati cally with the instruction 181 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 After completing the insertion and deletion procedures use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the program and verify that it has been changed correctly as shown in the following diagram Corrected Program assess insvasion Operands eae 00101 00105 00104 ne 00201 00102 00208 fend SY 8 4 11 Checking the Program This operation checks for programming errors and displays the program address and error when errors are found It is possible in PROGRAM mode only RUN monon PROGRAM 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the SRCH Key An input prompt will appear requesting the desired check level 3 Input the desired check level 0 1 or 2 The program check will begin when the check level is input and the first error found w
150. and then the CHG one 4 At this point a new SV constant can be input or the SV constant can be changed to a word address designation a To input a new SV constant input the constant and press the WRITE Key oa 2 Ea Jf ware i To change to a word address designation input the word address and press the WRITE Key AR B A SHIFT BONE 1 0 WRITE DM HR 188 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 Incrementing and Decrementing a Constant 1 2 3 This operation can be used to increment and decrement an SV constant It is possible only when the SV has been entered as a constant 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Display the desired timer or counter 3 Press the Down Arrow CHG and then the EXT Key The constant on the left is the old SV and the constant on the right will be come the new SV constant in step 5 4 Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to increment and decrement the con stant on the right In this case the SV is incremented once 3 5 Press the CLR Key twice to change the timer s SV to the new value 8 4 20 Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to change the BCD or hexadecimal value of a word being monitored using the procedure described in 8 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor It is possible
151. anging the DM designation in CW continuous mode and Feed Dir mode 65 4 When executing the word designation in CCW continuous mode and Feed Dir mode 74 8 When executing the DM designation in CCW continuous mode and Feed Dir mode 45 5 When changing the word designation in CCW continuous mode and Feed Dir mode 53 6 When changing the DM designation in CCW continuous mode and Feed Dir mode AVG 23 2 Average for 1 cycle constant designation 3 2 23 9 Average for 1 cycle word designation 84 2 Average for 64 cycles DM designation FCS 27 6 Adding one word and outputting to word 2 6 592 3 Adding 999 words and outputting to DM HEX 25 8 Word gt Word 2 6 72 2 DM gt DM HMS 30 7 When converting word to word 2 6 45 0 When converting DMto DM MAX 21 9 Searching one word and outputting to word 2 6 713 9 Searching 999 words and outputting to DM 147 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section Code Mnemonic ON execution Conditions Top min bottom max OFF execution time us time us MIN 21 9 Searching one word and outputting to word 2 6 713 9 Searching 999 words and outputting to DM NEG 12 0 Converting constant to word 3 0 12 8 Converting word to word 28 3 Converting DMto DM PID 392 5 Initializing word to word 3 3 418 8 Initializing DM to DM 29 3
152. ansmission of CPM2C S status to the DeviceNet Master 0 Hex Attach status information ahead of data 1 Hex Do not attach status information ahead of data 08 to 15 Not used 00 to 07 DeviceNet I O Link Write Data area OUT area settings 01 Hex I O area 1 IR 000 to IR 049 Master CPM2C S Hex I O area 2 IR 200 to IR 227 02 Hex 03 Hex DM area DM 0000 to DM 2047 04 Hex LR area LR 00 to LR 15 05 Hex X Hex HR area HR 00 to HR 19 07 Hex Timer counter area TC 000 to TC 255 08 to 15 Number of bytes see note 1 00 Hex 01 to 40 Hex equivalent to 0 to 64 decimal 00 to 15 Starting word address 0000 Hex 0000 to 07FF Hex equivalent to 0000 to 2047 decimal 00 to 07 DeviceNet I O Link Read Data area 00 Hex IN area settings 01 Hex I O area 1 IR 000 to IR 049 CPM2C S Master 02 Hex I O area 2 IR 200 to IR 227 03 Hex DM area DM 0000 to DM 2047 04 Hex LR area LR 00 to LR 15 05 Hex HR area HR 00 to HR 19 06 Hex Hex AR area AR 00 to AR 23 07 Hex Timer counter area TC 000 to TC 255 08 to 15 Number of bytes see note 1 00 Hex 01 to 40 Hex equivalent to 0 to 64 decimal 00 to 15 Starting word address 0000 Hex 0000 to 07FF Hex equivalent to 0000 to 2047 decimal Note 1 A system failure error PC Setup setting error will occur if the number of by tes is set to 00 Hex
153. arameters are specified in 2 bytes 4 digits in commands sent from OMRON DeviceNet Masters CV series PCs use the CMND instruction and C200HX HG HE PCs use the IOWR in struction 6 3 2 Command and Response Formats READ BYTE DATA 120 Reads the specified node s data in byte units from the DeviceNet Master When word data is being read the leftmost byte is read before the rightmost byte Up to 200 bytes can be read at one time Command Format ee Class ID Address Number of bytes Service code Instance ID Address H Destination node number Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 Response Format ft fe UL LI aa Leftmost byte byte Service code Rightmost byte Rightmost byte Source node number Number of bytes received Read data 200 bytes max Parameters Destination node number command Specify the node number of the CPM2C S containing the desired data in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal Service code command response Specify 1C Hex in the command The leftmost bit of the service code is turned ON in the response so 9C Hex is returned Class ID command Always 2F Hex Instance ID command Specify the data area containing the desired data in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal Use one of the codes listed in the following table Area name Address range Hex IR area IR 000 to IR 049 02 Hex IR area IR 200 to IR 227 03 Hex DM area DM 0000 to DM 2047 04 Hex
154. arting comparison in incrementing mode via DM 410 0 Registering a range comparison table and start ing comparison in incrementing decrementing pule input mode via word 418 9 Registering a range comparison table and start ing comparison in incrementing decrementing pule input mode via DM 380 6 Registering a range comparison table and start ing comparison in incrementing mode via word 399 7 Registering a range comparison table and start ing comparison in incrementing mode via DM 183 4 Only registering a target value comparison table in incrementing decrementing pulse input mode via word 810 3 Only registering a target value comparison table in incrementing decrementing pulse input mode via DM 182 4 Only registering a target value comparison table in incrementing mode via word 776 3 Only registering a target value comparison table in incrementing mode via DM 351 0 Only registering a range comparison table in incrementing decrementing pule input mode via word 359 1 Only registering a range comparison table in incrementing decrementing pule input mode via DM 331 2 Only registering a range comparison table in incrementing mode via word 335 9 Only registering a range comparison table in incrementing mode via DM Section 7 4 OFF execution time us 2 6 64 SPED 44 6 Specifying a constant in independent mode 53 8 Specif
155. ation is equal or when the result of an instruction execution is 0 07 Less Than LE Flag Turns ON when the result of a comparison operation is less 08 to 15 Not used Note DM 6601 in the PC Setup can be set to maintain the previous status of the Forced Status Hold Bit SR 25211 and the I O Hold Bit SR 25212 when power is turned OFF 91 PC Setup Section 4 6 4 5 AR Area These bits mainly serve as flags related to CPM2C S operation such as error flags high speed counter flags pulse output operation flags and cycle time values These bits retain their status even after the CPM2C S power supply has been turned off or when operation begins or stops Word s Bit s Function AR 00 00 DeviceNet switch settings error ON when a settings error occurred OFF when normal DRT 01 Node number duplication or Bus off error ON when an error occurred OFF when normal only 02 DeviceNet network power supply error ON when an error occurred OFF when normal 03 DeviceNet communications error ON when an error occurred OFF when normal 04 to 06 Not used 07 DeviceNet status error ON when an error occurred OFF when normal 08 Explicit Connection Flag ON Connection established 09 Polling Connection Flag OFF Connection not established 10 Bit Strobe Connection Flag 11 to 14 Not used 15 I O Link in progress ON when the I O Link is operating otherwise OFF AR
156. ay 15 ms Output point iy Min I O response time 10 10 12 15 15 62 ms Maximum I O Response Time The CPM2C S takes the longest to respond under the following circumstances 1 2 3 1 The CPM2C S receives an input signal just after the input refresh phase of the cycle 2 The Master s communications servicing just misses the Master to Slave transmission 3 The transmission is completed just after the Slave s communications servic ing ends The maximum I O response time Input ON response time Master s cycle time x 2 Transmission time x 3 Slave s cycle time x 2 Output ON response time Input Ew I O refresh point Input ON delay 10 ms Overseeing communications Input servicing etc bit 1 Program Program CPU i E execution E co processing Master s cycle time 10 ms Master Master Master to Slave to Slave to Slave Transmission time 12 ms x 3 ne 1 Program Program execution execution Output ON Slave s cycle time 15 ms delay 15 ms ai Maximum I O response time 10 10 x2 12x3 15x2 15 111 ms i 153 SECTION 8 Using Programming Devices This section outlines the operations possible with the SYSMAC CPT SYSMAC Support Software SSS and the Program ming Consoles Actual CPT operating procedures are provided in the CPT
157. block Bin 2 LED indicator 3 CPU Unit power supply connector 1 2 3 3 1 Terminal Block Terminals for AC power supply input and service power supply 24 VDC 2 LED Indicator Lights when power is supplied 3 CPU Unit Power Supply Connector Use the connecting cable provided as an accessory to connect this connec tor to the power supply connector on the CPU Unit 24 VDC Note The ratings for the CPM2C PA201 AC Power Supply Unit are 100 to 240 VAC input 24 VDC 600 mA output The maximum current that can be supplied via the CPU Unit power supply connector and the service power supply terminals on the terminal block is 600 mA 2 2 4 CPM2C CIF01 Peripheral RS 232C Adapter Unit Front View Do not use the CPM2C CIF01 with any PC other than a CPM2C or CPM2C S Do not connect another CPM2C CIF01 or the CPM2C CIF11 to the CPM2C CIF01 The CPM2C CN111 can be connected to the CPM2C CIF01 but the peripheral port and the RS 232C port of the CPM2C CN111 cannot be used simultaneously If an attempt to use these ports simultaneously is made communica tions will not be performed properly and this may result in malfunc tion of equipment 1 Peripheral port 2 RS 232C port 3 Connector 1 2 3 1 Peripheral Port Used to connect to Programming Devices including Programming Consoles host computers or general purpose external devices Use a special connecting cable CS1W CN114 CS1W CN118 for connections Note a A C
158. bration resistance 10 to 57 Hz amplitude 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m s in X Y and Z directions for 80 minutes according Time coefficient 8 minutes x coefficient factor 10 total time 80 min Shock resistance 147 m s2 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Noise terminal voltage FCC class A 40 Unit Components Section 2 2 2 2 Unit Components 2 2 1 CPU Unit Components CPU Unit Component Names Front View CPM2C S100C and CPM2C S110C Right Side View 9 DIP switch 8 Communications port 5 PC status indicators 6 Input indicators ja 7 Output indicators M S IE 2 I O connector 3 CompoBus S terminal block f l imi Front View CPM2C S100C DRT and CPM2C S110C DRT 9 DIP switch 13 Expansion I O connector output connector 8 Communications port 5 PC status indicators 10 Rotary switches 6 Input indicators 3 CompoBus S 7 Output indicators terminal block 4 DeviceNet communications connector 2 I O connector Top View Bottom View 11 Battery UT I Lt 12 Low battery detection switch Power supply connector CPU Unit Component Descriptions 1 2 3 1 Power Supply Connector Connect the power supply 24 VDC to this connector Connect the provided power supply cable s red lead to 24 VDC and its black lead to 0 VDC 2 I O Connector Connects the CPU Unit to external input and output devices 3 CompoBus S Terminal Block
159. cation for CPM2C S PCs ecane va eaa cent A 4 2k CPU UNDIS 6 3 5 Patents Hartly i Eee plete e E SL EADS Hakab theese baselines EOSS 4 2 2 Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units 00 0 0000 4 2 3 T O Allocation Examples 0 0 0 eee cece eee 4 3 I O Allocation to CompoBus S Slaves 0 0 cee cc eee eee AEA SROATCAL sha hice eel econ cet te ale th aca eee NN raat otha ana Sele eh E 4S AR Alea ss oss niee Soe Bh Big 8 PALS DORE TE ae ee SO Re ate a E Nes Boece UE 4 6 PC SQUUp rre ater obs n bei Lact Ghd od detect ieewee a a Oo boas cs ed EL lt r ee ee 4 6 2 PE Setup Setup gs ir 6s sion Seale ea esis He A OE TINS bb eee eee 4 7 Basic PC Operation and I O Processes 0 0 eee ccc eee eee 4 7 1 Startup Mode sr ccc cee oes ahaa eee So de ea Seo Ce es 4 7 2 Hold Bit Status ec sce ee ee A Eee Se See eee owe Se E 4 7 3 Program Memory Write protection 0 0 eee eee eee 4 7 4 RS 232C Port Servicing Time 0 00 0 0 ee eee 4 7 5 Peripheral Port Servicing Time 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 4 7 6 Cycle Monitor Time sse sestrari e ae eee bas eR we ee ee Ree 4 7 7 Minimum Cycle Time 0 0 eee cee ee 4 7 8 Input Time Constants 0 2 eee eee 4 7 9 Error Log Settings sssini gts yas dy Ob SN ee oiia 4 8 Brror LOE 62 6 5 enone coe Ad ttl ides tude betwen ie bap ten tee eon 81 PC Setup 4 1 Word address D Q oO Section 4 6 Allocation
160. ce power supply terminals on the terminal block can be used for input power supply Can be used for input power supply g 24 VDC Use the following to obtain the capacity of the service power supply that can be used Example CPU Unit 3 Expansion I O Units Power consumption 4 W the CPU Unit s power consumption 1 W the Ex pansion I O Unit s power consumption x 3 No of Expansion I O Units 7 W Service power supply current 14 4 W CPM2C PA201 s rated capacity 7 W power consumption 24 V 308 mA If the 24 VDC output either the service power supply or the power supply to the CPU Unit is overloaded or is short circuited the voltage will drop and the output will turn OFF Take external countermeasures to ensure the safety of the system in such an event Failure to do so may result in a serious accident Do not connect a power supply to the service power supply terminals If an AC power supply is mistakenly connected to these terminals the internal circuitry will be damaged 61 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 4 Removing and Wiring I O Connectors The following tables provide specifications of compatible I O connectors Compatible Connector Specifications OMRON I O connectors Connector Specifications Model number FFT 24 pin soldered Connector Fujitsu FCN 361J024 AU equivalent C500 CE241 ip I connector and cover Cover Fujitsu FCN 360C024 J2 equivalent Pa
161. ceNet communications and appear on the CPM2C S100C DRT and CPM2C S110C DRT only Indicator Color Status Meaning MS Green ON Normal status Flashing Incomplete settings reading switch settings Red ON Fatal hardware error watchdog timer error Flashing Non fatal error such as incorrect switch settings OFF e Power is not being supplied e Waiting for initialization to start e Reset in progress NS Green ON Online Communications established Normal network status when communications have been established Flashing Online Communications not established Normal network status when communications haven t been established Red ON Fatal communications error The Unit detected an error indicating that network communications are disabled e Node number duplication e Bus off error detected Flashing Non fatal communications error Communications timeout OFF Offline Power supply OFF Waiting for completion of the node number duplication check in the Master e Incorrect switch settings e Power supply OFF Unit Components Section 2 2 6 Input Indicators The input indicators are lit when the corresponding input terminal is ON The status of an input indicator will reflect the status of the input even when that input is being used for a high speed counter Note a When interrupt inputs are used in interrupt input mode the indica tor may not light e
162. cified range of I O words will be refreshed when IORF 97 is executed The cycle time is the sum of the time required for program execution I O refresh ing and communications port servicing A minimum cycle time 1 to 9 999 ms can be set in the PC Setup DM 6619 When a minimum cycle time has been set CPU operation is paused after pro gram execution until the minimum cycle time is reached CPU operation will not be paused if the actual cycle time is longer than the minimum cycle time set in DM 6619 A fatal error will occur and PC operation will stop if a maximum cycle time has been set in the PC Setup DM 6618 and the actual cycle time exceeds that set ting The default settings for RS 232C and peripheral port servicing are 5 each of the cycle time but these settings can be changed between 0 and 99 in the PC Setup The RS 232C port s setting is in DM 6616 and the peripheral port s setting is in DM 6617 Refer to Section 7 Cycle Time and I O Response Time for more details and pre cautions on the cycle time Overseeing processes Main program I I e e e e e e e e H _O o 3 lf a minimum cycle time has been set in DM 6619 CPU operation is paused until the minimum cycle l time is reached l L I O refreshing RS 232C port servicing The servicing time can be se in DM 6616 l The servicing time can be set T in DM 6617 l Po eS Mi roig T ee i p l Peripheral port servicin
163. ckup time 2 year lifetime at 25 C CPU Unit with clock 2 year lifetime at 25 C CPU Unit without clock capacitor 10 day backup at 25 C CPU Unit without clock lithium battery 5 year lifetime at 25 C Battery error detection Supported Supported Communications in CPU Unit Peripheral port via communications port Programming Console Set with Communications Switch Peripheral bus Set with Communications Switch Host Link with Slave initiated communications No protocol Programming Console Set with Communications Switch Peripheral bus Set with Communications Switch Host Link with Slave initiated communications No protocol RS 232C port via communications port Peripheral bus Set with Communications Switch Host Link No protocol 1 1 PC Link 1 1 NT Link Peripheral bus Set with Communications Switch Host Link No protocol 1 1 PC Link 1 1 NT Link Input time constant Can be set to 1 2 3 5 10 20 40 or 80 ms Default 10 ms Can be set to 1 2 3 5 10 20 40 or 80 ms Default 10 ms 28 Preparation for Operation Section 1 6 Differences in I O Memory IR Area Differences Function CompoBus S input bits IR 020 to IR 027 CompoBus S output bits IR 030 to IR 037 Work bits 672 bits 928 bits IR 028 to IR 029 IR 028 to IR 049 IR 038 to IR 049 IR 200 to IR 227 IR 200 to IR 227 AR Area Differences
164. ction e g OUT OUT NOT DIFU 13 DIFD 14 KEEP 11 SFT 10 Although this is allowed for certain instructions check instruction requirements to confirm that the program is correct or rewrite the program so that each bit is controlled by only one instruction JMP UNDEFD JME 05 has been used with no JMP 04 with the same jump number Add a JMP 04 with the same number or delete the JME 05 that is not being used SBS UNDEFD A subroutine exists that is not called by SBS 91 Program a subroutine call in the proper place or delete the subroutine if it is not required 209 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 9 5 9 5 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Use the following flowcharts to troubleshoot errors that occur during operation Main Check No PWR indicator lit Check power supply See page 211 Yes RUN indicator lit No Operation stopped Check for fatal errors See page 212 Yes ERR ALM indicator Flashing flashing Check for non fatal errors See page 213 Not lit Is I O sequence No normal Check I O See page 214 Yes Operating No environment normal Check operating environment See page 216 Yes Replace the CPU Unit 210 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 9 5 Power Supply Check Connect power supply Is power being supplied Yes Is PWR indicator lit Is voltage adequate No Set supply v
165. ction of SOL1 Is the IR 01003 output indicato operating normally No Yes Monitor the ON OFF status of IR 01003 Check the voltage at the Wire correctly IR 01003 terminals with a Programming Device Operation OK Is output wiring Operation OK Ne A correct To next Yes page Disconnect the external wires and check the conductivity of each wire Operation OK No Check output device Replace the CPU Unit Ex pansion Unit or Expansion SOL1 I O Unit with the problem 214 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 9 5 No Are the IR 00002 and IR 00003 input indi cators operating A normally rom previous Yes page Check the voltage at Check the voltage at the IR 00002 and the IR 00002 and IR 00003 terminals IR 00003 terminals Operation OK Yes No No Are the terminal screws loose or con nectors disconnected Operation OK Yes No Yes C Is input wiring correct No Check operation by using a dummy input signal to turn the input ON and OFF Tighten the terminal screws and connect Wire correctly connectors Operation OK Yes i 7 Replace the CPU Unit Replace the CPU Unit Check input devices Return to start Expansion Unit or Expansion Unit or LS1 and LS2 Expansion 1 O Unit Expansion I O Unit 215 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 9 5 Environmental Conditions Check 216 En
166. d DM 6640 to 00 to 15 Not used DM 6641 DM 6642 00 to 03 High speed counter mode 0 Hex Differential phase mode 5 kHz 1 Hex Pulse direction input mode 20 kHz 2 Hex Up down input mode 20 kHz 4 Hex Increment mode 20 kHz 04 to 07 High speed counter reset mode 0 Z phase and software reset 1 Software reset only 08 to 15 High speed counter Synchronized pulse control for IR 00000 to IR 00002 a Hex Don t use either function 1 Hex Use as high speed counters Hex Use for synchronized pulse control 10 to 500 Hz 03 Hex Use for synchronized pulse control 20 Hz to 1 kHz 04 Hex Use for synchronized pulse control 300 Hz to 20 kHz DM 6643 00 to 15 Not used DM 6644 99 PC Setup Section 4 6 Words Bo O O o o o ooo S SO RS 232C Port Communications Settings The following settings are read regularly by the CPU while the PC is ON If pin 3 of the CPM2C S CPU Unit s DIP switch is ON communications through the CPM2C S RS 232C port are gov erned by the default settings all 0 regardless of the settings in DM 6645 through DM 6649 DM 6645 00 to 03 Port settings 0 Hex Standard 1 start bit 7 data bits even parity 2 stop bits 9 600 bps Host Link unit number 0 1 Hex Settings in DM 6646 Any other setting will cause a non fatal error and AR 1302 will turn ON 04 to 07 CTS control setting 0 Hex Disable CTS control 1
167. d ignored INT 89 Read mask Reads mask status Reads mask status INT 89 Clear Not supported ignored Not supported ignored Minimum pulse width 50 us min 50 us min High speed Count mode counter Differential phase up down mode Pulse plus direction mode Up down pulse mode Increment mode Differential phase up down mode Pulse plus direction mode Up down pulse mode Increment mode Max counter frequency 5 kHz in differential phase up down mode 20 kHz in pulse plus direction mode up down pulse mode and increment mode 5 kHz in differential phase up down mode 20 kHz in pulse plus direction mode up down pulse mode and increment mode Counter PV range 8 388 608 to 8 388 607 in differential phase up down mode pulse plus direction mode and up down pulse mode 0 to 16 777 215 in increment mode 8 388 608 to 8 388 607 in differential phase up down mode pulse plus direction mode and up down pulse mode 0 to 16 777 215 in increment mode target value match table Same direction same SV not possible Same direction same SV not possible Method used to reference the target value match Comparison of all values in the table regardless of order of appearance in table Comparison of all values in the table regardless of order of appearance in table results Reading range comparison Check AR 1100 to AR 1107 or execu
168. d in that address can be monitored by pressing the MONTR Key 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 z the desired program address and press the Down Arrow Key MONTR If the status of a bit is being monitored that bit s status can be changed using the Force Set Reset operation Refer to 8 4 24 Force Set Reset for details If the status of a word is being monitored that word s value can be changed using the Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification operation Refer to 8 4 20 Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification 8 4 21 Binary Data Modification 8 4 22 Signed Decimal Data Modification and 8 4 23 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification for details Follow the procedure below to monitor the status of a particular bit 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the bit address of the desired bit and press the MONTR Key oeni The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the pre vious or next bit In MONITOR mode or PROGRAM mode the displayed bit s status can be changed using the Force Set Reset operation Refer to 8 4 24 Force Set Reset for details Follow the procedure below to monitor the status of a particular word 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the word address of the desired word sae a a Ee MONTR The Up or Down Arrow Key can be presse
169. d then the RESET Key A confirmation message will ap pear i Note If you mistakenly press the wrong key press CLR and start again from the beginning 3 Press the NOT Key to clear the force set reset status of bits in all data areas 8 4 26 Hex ASCII Display Change This operation is used to convert word data displays back and forth between 4 digit hexadecimal data and ASCII It is possible in any mode The displayed PV of the timer or counter cannot be changed RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 2 3 1 Monitor the status of the desired word s according to the procedure de scribed in 8 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor While the multiple addresses are being monitored the leftmost word is subject to change Multiple address monitor 2 Press the TR Key to switch to ASCII display The display will toggle between hexadecimal and ASCII displays each time the TR Key is pressed Note 1 A message contained in three words can be displayed by using ASCII dis play in combination with the Three word monitor operation 2 The Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification Operation can be used while dis playing ASCII data Input values in 4 digit hexadecimal 193 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 8 4 27 Displaying the Cycle Time This operation is used to display the current average cycle time scan time It is possible only in RUN or MONITOR mode while the program is b
170. d to display the status of the pre vious or next word The displayed word s status can be changed using the Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification operation Refer to 8 4 20 Hexadecimal BCD Data Modi 183 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 fication 8 4 21 Binary Data Modification 8 4 22 Signed Decimal Data Mod ification and 8 4 23 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification for details 4 Press the CLR Key to end monitoring Note The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode Multiple Address The status of up to six bits and words can be monitored simultaneously although Monitoring only three can be shown on the display at any one time 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the address of the first bit or word and press the MONTR Key 3 Repeat step 2 up to 6 times to display the next addresses to be monitored B sHiFT CONTI 4 Montr EM_ iMontal DM If 4 or more bits and words are being monitored the bits and words that do not appear on the display can be displayed by pressing the MONTR Key If the MONTR Key is pressed alone the display will shift to the right If more than six bits and words are input monitoring of the bit or word input first will be canceled 4 Press the CLR Key to stop monitoring the leftmost bit or word and clear it from the display
171. ddress Address H The leftmost two digits of the 4 digit starting address 122 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 READ WORD DATA Write data command Contains the data that will be written in the specified data area Input word data with the leftmost byte bits 8 to 15 preceding the rightmost byte bits 0 to 7 If the command contains an odd number of bytes of write data the last byte will be written to the leftmost byte of the last word Number of bytes received response Indicates the number of bytes of data in hexadecimal from the source node number on Source node number response Indicates the node number in hexadecimal of the CPM2C S that returned the response Precautions The range of data specified by the data area instance ID starting address Ad dress L and Address H and write data parameters must not exceed the range of the CPM2C S data area Reads the specified node s data in word units two byte units from the Device Net Master When word data is being read the leftmost byte is read before the rightmost byte Up to 100 words can be read at one time Command Format fof ft Class o Address Number of words Service code Instance ID Address H Destination node number Response Format Leftmost byte Leftmost byte Service code Rightmost byte Rightmost byte Source node number Number of bytes received Read data 200 bytes max Parameters D
172. ddress monitoring 2 Press the SHIFT TR NOT Keys to display the leftmost word as unsigned decimal At this point the contents of the displayed word can be changed with an un signed decimal input Refer to 8 4 23 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification 3 Press the CLR Key or the SHIFT TR Keys to end the unsigned decimal dis play and return to normal monitoring 8 4 18 Three Word Data Modification Z N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to change the contents of one or more of the 3 con secutive words displayed in the Three Word Monitor operation It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion I O Units may operate unex pectedly 1 Monitor the status of the desired words according to the procedure de scribed 8 4 15 Three Word Monitor Three word monitor 187 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 2 Press the CHG Key to begin 3 word data modification The cursor will ap pear next to the contents of the leftmost word it bi i 3 Input the new value for the
173. de lt 175 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 6 Press the WRITE Key to assign the displayed instruction to the function code F 8 4 6 Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and Monitoring 1 O Bit Status 1 2 3 This operation is used to display the specified program memory address and is possible in any mode In the RUN or MONITOR mode the I O bit status of bits in the program will be displayed RUN MONITOR PROGRAM When inputting a program for the first time it is generally written to Program Memory starting from address 000 Because this address appears when the display is cleared it is not necessary to specify it When inputting a program starting from other than 000 or to read or modify a program that already exists in memory the desired address must be desig nated 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the desired address It is not necessary to input leading zeroes c A A i if 3 Press the Down Arrow Key In the RUN or MONITOR mode ON OFF status of the bit will be displayed Pressing the MONTR Key will change to the I O monitor display Bits can be force set or force reset from the I O monitor display Press the CLR Key to return to I O bit status monitoring of the initial address Note The ON OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode 4
174. der program and the DM area as well as the expansion instruction settings i EREE Se E es eee ere E E E Check the program 229 Appendix A Standard Models CPM2C S CPU Units Appearance Standard CPU Units Transistor outputs Sinking CPM2C S100C Sourcing CPM2C S110C DeviceNet Slave functions CPU Units with Device Net Slave functions CPM2C S100C DRT Expansion I O Units Note Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual W356 for descriptions of the specifica tions and wiring of Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units Classification and Appearance Units with Terminal Blocks CPM2C S110C DRT 6 points 4 points I O capacity Inputs Outputs Model 10 I O points 6 points 24 VDC 4 relay outputs CPM2C 10EDR 20 I O points 12 points 24 VDC 8 relay outputs CPM2C 20EDR DELLE PAPPI 8 output points 8 relay outputs CPM2C 8ER Units with 24 I O points 16 points 24 VDC 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 24EDTC eee 8 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 24EDT1C co 32 I O points 16 points 24 VDC 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 32EDTC 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 32EDT1C 8 input points 8 points 24 VDC CPM2C 8EDC 16 input points 16 points 24 VDC CPM2C 16EDC 8 output points 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 8ETC 8 transist
175. e CPM2C S will enter when the power is turned ON 9 1 2 Flash Memory Precautions Observe the following precautions to protect the flash memory and ensure proper operation 1 2 3 1 If changes are made in the read only DM area DM 6144 through DM 6599 or PC Setup DM 6600 through DM 6655 the PC s operating mode must be changed to write the new contents to flash memory If backup battery is changed before the changes are written to flash memory the changes will be lost The changes can be saved by switching the CPM2C S to RUN or MONITOR mode or turning the CPM2C S OFF and then ON again 2 When contents of the program read only DM DM 6144 through DM 6599 or PC Setup DM 6600 through DM 6655 have been changed startup proc essing will take up to 1 200 ms longer than usual Be sure to take this one time startup delay into account if it may affect operations 3 If one of the following three operations is performed in MONITOR or RUN mode the CPM2C S cycle time will be extended by up to 1 200 ms and interrupts will be disabled while the program or PC Setup is being overwrit ten e Program changes with the online edit operation e Changes to the read only DM area DM 6144 through DM 6599 e Changes to the PC Setup DM 6600 through DM 6655 A SCAN TIME OVER error won t occur during these operations Be sure to take this delay in the CPM2C S I O response times into account when per forming online editing 9 1 3 C
176. e communications port cover Be sure to dispose of the old battery in accordance with local laws and regula tions A CPM2C BAT01 Backup Battery is built into CPU Units that are equipped with an internal clock Replace the battery within two years when used under 25 C When the battery voltage drops the ERR ALM indicator will flash and SR 25308 will be turned ON Refer to page 207 In this case replace the battery within seven days Use the procedure below when replacing the battery 1 Stop CPM2C S operation and turn OFF the power supply 2 Remove the battery cover with a flat blade screwdriver Battery cover 219 Battery Replacement Section 9 7 4 Install the new battery Be sure that the connector is aligned correctly and the wires are not pinched or kinked when the battery is inserted 5 To enable the detection of low battery errors slide the Low Battery Detection Switch towards the front of the Unit and set bits 12 to 15 of DM 6655 to 0 Low Battery Detection Switch crave l 6 Replace the battery cover 7 Write the next date that the battery should be replaced on the reminder label The battery lifetime of the CPU Unit with clock is 2 years at 25 C and that of the CPU Unit without clock is 5 years at 25 C 220 SECTION 10 Expansion Memory Unit This section describes how to use the CPM1 EMU01 V1 Expansion Memory Unit Follow the handling precautions and pro cedures to properly use t
177. e 2 second timer Two second Timer 1 2 3 ar the doa open condition IR 20000 Ka Ka WRITE 2 Input the normally closed AND condition T002 It isn t necessary to eal Baak zeroes ie wr m WRITE 3 Input the 2 second timer T002 TIM 2 4 Input the SV for T002 0 C A i 4 Inputting the 10 count The following key operations are used to input the 10 count counter Counter 15 2 Biz i the daa open condition IR 20000 eA eA WRITE 2 Input the normally open AND condition T001 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes AND B TIM WRITE 198 Programming Example Section 8 5 3 Input the normally closed condition IR 20000 LD Cc A A A A Boeuoads 4 Input the counter 000 A WRITE 5 Input the SV for counter 000 0010 10 counts B A x 1 0 WRITE 1 2 3 1 Input the normally open condition IR 20000 Cc A A A A Beguaal E 2 Input the normally closed AND condition T001 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes B AND NOT TIM 1 4k WRITE 3 Input the OUT instruction IR 01000 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes B A A A JEA I 6 Inputting the END 001 Input END 01 The display shows three digits in the function code but only the Instruction last two digits are input for CPM2C
178. e generation of an interrupt sig nal until the interrupt processing routine is called and from when the interrupt processing routine is completed until returning to the original position Item Contents Time Interrupt ON delay This is the delay time from the time the interrupt input bit turns ON until the time 50 us that the interrupt is executed This delay does not apply to other interrupts Wait for completion of When a process that disables masks the interrupt is being executed this is See interrupt mask processing the time required for that process to be completed below Change to interrupt This is the time it takes to change processing to the interrupt process 10 us processing Return This is the time it takes from execution of RET 93 to return to the processing 10 us that was interrupted Example Calculation Mask Processing Interrupts are masked during processing of the operations described below Un til the processing is completed any interrupts will remain masked for the indi cated times Generation and clearing of non fatal errors Interrupts will be masked for up to 100 us when a non fatal error has been generated and the error contents are being registered in the PC or when an error is being cleared Online editing Operation will stop and interrupts will be masked for up to 600 ms for DM 6144 to DM 6655 when online editing is executed or the settings are changed with STUP during o
179. e interrupt inputs counter mode can be used for incrementing counters or decrementing counters 2 kHz and trigger an interrupt executing the interrupt program when the count matches the target value Two interrupt inputs can be used CPM2C S PCs have two outputs that can produce 10 Hz to 10 kHz pulses single phase outputs e When used as single phase pulse outputs there can be two outputs with a fre quency range of 10 Hz to 10 kHz with a fixed duty ratio or 0 1 to 999 9 Hz witha variable duty ratio 0 to 100 duty ratio e When used as pulse plus direction or up down pulse outputs there can be just one output with a frequency range of 10 Hz to 10 kHz High speed Input Capabilities for Machine Control High speed Interrupt Input Function The CPU Units have 2 inputs that can be used as interrupt inputs These inputs are shared with quick response inputs and interrupt inputs in counter mode and have a minimum input signal width of 50 us and response time of 0 3 ms When an interrupt input goes ON the main program is stopped and the interrupt pro gram is executed System Configurations Section 1 2 Quick response Input Function Stabilizing Input Filter Function The CPU Units have 2 inputs that can be used as quick response inputs to reli ably read inputs with a signal width as short as 50 us regardless of the cycle time These inputs are shared with interrupt inputs and interrupt inputs in counter mode The in
180. e servicing time will be 0 34 ms minimum The entire servicing time will not be used unless processing requests exist 4 7 6 Cycle Monitor Time Bit 15 0 DM6618 PSSM nea Cycle Monitor Time Enable and Units 00 Hex Setting disabled time fixed at 120 ms 01 Hex Setting in 00 to 07 enabled units 10 ms 02 Hex Setting in 00 to 07 enabled units 100 ms 03 Hex Setting in 00 to 07 enabled units 1 s Cycle monitor time setting When bits 08 to 15 are not 00 00 to 99 2 digits BCD units set in bits 08 to 15 Default 120 ms The cycle monitor time is used for checking for extremely long cycle times as can happen when the program goes into an infinite loop If the cycle time ex ceeds the cycle monitor setting a fatal error FALS 9F will be generated 104 Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 Note 1 The units used for the maximum and current cycle times recorded in the AR area AR 14 and AR 15 are determined by the setting for the cycle monitor time in DM 6618 as shown below Bits 08 to 15 set to 01 Hex 0 1 ms Bits 08 to 15 set to 02 Hex 1 ms Bits 08 to 15 set to 03 Hex 10 ms 2 If the cycle time is 1 s or longer the cycle time read from Programming De vices will be 999 9 ms The correct maximum and current cycle times will be recorded in the AR area Example If 0230 is set in DM 6618 an FALS 9F error will not occur until the cycle time exceeds 3 s If the actu
181. e time is as follows 2x CPM2C S cycle time CompoBus S communications time CompoBus S Slave input delay CompoBus S Slave output delay CompoBus S CompoBus S input refreshing output refreshing Alea GF CPM2C S cycle i See note 2 I CompoBus S CompoBus S CompoBus S CompoBus S communications communica communica communica processing tions time tions time tions time SS See See gs E E gt Cycle time See note 2 Input delay Slave input i Output delay Slave output Note The Slave input is not read for almost one PC cycle because it goes ON just after the start of CompoBus S communications processing 1 The input is read dur ing the next CompoBus S communications processing cycle 2 150 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 7 3 Interrupt Processing Time 1 2 3 This section explains the processing times involved from the time an interrupt is executed until the interrupt processing routine is called and from the time an in terrupt processing routine is completed until returning to the initial location This explanation applies to input interrupts interval timer interrupts and high speed counter interrupts 1 Interrupt source Interrupt ON delay Wait for completion of interrupt mask processing Change to interrupt processing Execution of interrupt routine 6 Return to initial location oR W P The table below shows the times involved from th
182. ead through a Master mounted in a CS1 CVM1 or CV series PC For details on explicit messages refer to the CS1 Series DeviceNet Unit Opera tion Manual W380 for CS1 series PCs and refer to the DeviceNet Compo Bus D Operation Manual W267 for CVM1 and CV series PCs For details on CMND 194 refer to the CS1 Series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 for CS1 series PCs and refer to the CVM1 CV Series CV500 CV100 C V2000 CVM1 Programmable Controllers Operation Manual Ladder Diagrams W202 for CVM1 and CV series PCs Master s node number 63 Slave s network address 1 Slave s node number 2 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 CMND 194 Operand Details CMND S D C e Command Words Contents Function Hex EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code 2801 Hex Slave node number 02 Hex READ BYTE DATA command service code 1C Hex Class ID 002F Hex Instance ID 0001 Hex specifies data area Starting read address 000A Hex specifies IR 010 Address L 0A Hex Address H 00 Hex Number of bytes 28 Hex specifies 40 bytes E The rightmost byte of S 5 is not used e Response Words The results are stored as follows Contents Function Hex D 28 01 EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code 2801 Hex D 1 00 00 Normal completion code 0000 Hex D 2 002A Number of bytes received 2A Hex indicates 42 bytes This
183. eated with the Master The input and output areas used in the I O Link can be allocated independently and the data areas starting addresses and size of these Read Write areas can be spe cified freely The Read Write areas can be set in the PC Setup or using the Devi ceNet Configurator Explicit message communications can be initiated from the Master to read or write data in any data area in the CPM2C S Basic Functions CPU Unit Variations The CPM2C S PCs are one piece PCs with 10 I O points 6 inputs and 4 out puts in a built in connector There are 2 types of outputs available sinking tran sistor outputs and sourcing transistor outputs All CPM2C S PCs require a 24 VDC power supply Expansion I O Units and CompoBus S Slaves CompoBus S Slaves and up to 3 Expansion I O Units can be connected to the CPU Unit to increase the PC s I O capacity to a maximum of 362 I O points 3 System Configurations Section 1 2 Share Programming Devices There are 23 different Expansion I O Units available including Units with 32 I O points 24 I O points 20 I O points 10 I O points 8 input points 8 output points 16 inputs points and 16 output points The maximum I O capacity of 106 I O points is achieved by connecting three 32 point Expansion I O Units to the CPU Unit The CompoBus S Master functions allow I O Slaves to be connected providing an additional capacity of up to 256 I O points 128 inputs and 128 outputs T
184. ecified range of I O words The specified I O words will be refreshed when IORF 97 is executed IORF 97 can be used to refresh I O from the main program or the interrupt pro gram Functions Listed by Usage Section 1 4 When IORF 97 is used the cycle time is extended by the time required to re fresh the specified I O words Overseeing processes Main program IORF 97 executed Cycle time Immediate refreshing I O refreshing I O refreshing RS 232C port servicing Peripheral port servicing 1 4 Functions Listed by Usage Machine Control Functions Usage Function Refer to Reduce wiring save space and minimize PC load by controlling Distributed control using DeviceNet Page equipment with a few low capacity PCs dispersed near each piece of 115 equipment rather than a single centralized PC Use remote I O to save resources and space Use CompoBus S Remote Terminals Page 109 Receive high speed Max count frequency of 2 kHz Use interrupt input counter mode to W353 count inputs single phase read the present value without For example calculating interrupts m or position with an Max count frequency of 5 KHz differential Use high speed counter to read the encoder phase or 20 kHz single phase present value without interrupts Generate a pulse output based on a multiple of an input pulse to Pulse synchronization synchronize control of a peripheral process with the main process
185. ect Online O from the menu bar and Go online G from the Online menu 2 Aconfirmation message will be displayed Click OK to go online ty Cee SL CE e 3 The ladder diagram display will change to indicate the online connection Changes to Program showing the PC s operating mode 161 SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 8 1 Transferring the Program Use the following procedure to transfer a program to the PC Before attempting to transfer the program make sure that the SYSMAC CPT Support Software is online and that the CPM2C S is in PROGRAM mode The program cannot be transferred unless the PC is in PROGRAM mode 1 2 3 1 Check that the PC is in PROGRAM mode select Online O from the menu bar and Transfer Computer PC T from the Online menu ca Nike Make sure that the CPM2C S is in PROGRAM mode before attempting to transfer the program 2 Select Program and click Transfer Computer PC to begin transfer the program b Click to begin a Select Program __ SO a Checking Operation in MONITOR Mode Use the following procedure to switch the CPM2C S to MONITOR mode 1 2 3 1 Make sure that the SYSMAC CPT Support Software is online Select On line O from the menu bar select Mode M and then MONITOR M 2 A confirmation message will be displayed Click O
186. ed in this region restored in this region Note If the power supply voltage fluctuates around 85 of the PC s rated voltage PC operation may stop and restart repeatedly When repeated stopping and starting will cause problems with the controlled system set up a protective circuit such as a circuit that shuts OFF the power supply to sensitive equipment until the power supply voltage returns to the rated value 19 CPM2C S Structure and Operation Section 1 3 1 3 5 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts Basic CPU Operation Initialization processing is performed when the power is turned ON If there are no initialization errors the overseeing processes program execution I O re freshing and communications port servicing are performed repeatedly cyclical ly Startup initialization PC cycle time Be Overseeing processes CompoBus S input refreshing Program execution Cycle time calculation CompoBus S output refreshing I O refreshing DeviceNet I O refreshing DeviceNet message communications RS 232C port servicing Peripheral port servicing Check hardware Check memory Read data from flash memory program read only DM data and PC Setup settings Check for battery error Preset the watch maximum cycle time Check program memory Refresh bits for expansion functions Read input data from CompoBus S remote I O Slaves Execute
187. ed when the count is within the set range Execute a special process when a timer times out For example stopping a conveyor at very precise time independent of the cycle time after the workpiece is detected Interval timer interrupt One shot mode Repeat a special process at regular intervals For example the speed of a sheet feeder can be monitored by measuring the input signal from an encoder at regular intervals and calculating the speed Interval timer interrupt Scheduled interrupt mode Perform simple positioning by outputting pulses to a motor driver that accepts pulse train inputs Pulse output function Receive an analog input and output an analog output Analog I O Unit Connect the Analog I O Unit to the CPU Unit Receive temperature sensor input directly at the PC Temperature Sensor Unit Connect the Temperature Sensor Unit to the CPU Unit W353 Basic Functions 24 Usage Function Refer to Set the cycle time to a fixed interval Set a minimum fixed cycle time in the PC Setup Page Stop PC operation when the cycle time exceeds a Set a maximum watch cycle time in the PC Setup 98 maximum setting Keep all outputs ON when PC operation stops Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit SR 25212 Page Retain the contents of I O memory when starting Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit SR 25212 90 operation Retain the contents of I O memory when the PC is Turn ON
188. een CompoBus S Slaves 0 2000 7 3 Interrupt Processing Time 0 0 eect en eee e ee ee 7 4 One to one PC Link I O Response Time 0 0 00 cece eee ee eee 135 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 7 1 Cycle Time 7 1 1 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts Initialization is performed when the power is turned ON If there are no initializa tion errors the overseeing processes program execution I O refreshing and communications port servicing are performed repeatedly cyclically Basic CPU Operation 136 Startup initialization Overseeing processes CompoBus S input refreshing Program execution Cycle time calculation CompoBus S output refreshing PC cycle time I O refreshing DeviceNet I O refreshing DeviceNet message communications RS 232C port servicing Peripheral port servicing Check hardware Check memory Read data from flash memory program read only DM data and PC Setup settings o Check for battery error Preset the watch maximum cycle time o o Check program memory Refresh bits for expansion functions o o Read input data from CompoBus S Remote I O Slaves o Execute the program Refer to the Programming Manual W353 for details on cycle time and I O response times o Wait for minimum cycle time if a minimum cycle time has been set in the PC Setup DM 6619 Calculate cycle time
189. eing executed RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the MONTR Key to display the cycle time MS in the display indicates i the unit ms for the cycle time There might be differences in displayed values when the MONTR Key is pressed repeatedly These differences are caused by changing execution conditions 8 4 28 Reading and Setting the Clock This operation is used to read or set the CPU s clock The clock can be read in any mode but can be set in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only Operaion RON WONITOR PROGRAM Read clock OK Set clock OK 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the FUN Key SHIFT Key and then the MONTR Key to display the date and time SHIFT MONTR 3 Press the CHG Key to change the date and or time CHG The digit that can be changed will flash If necessary input a new value with the Up and Down Arrow Keys or Numeric Keys Press the CHG Key to move the cursor to the next digit The following table shows the setting ranges for each value Year Minute Second Day of week 00 to 99 ea i ee 00 to 59 00 to 59 Oto6 SUN to SAT 4 Press the WRITE Key to write the new value WRITE Press the CLR Key to return to the initial display 194 Programming Example Section 8 5 8 5 Programming E
190. ely The Read Write areas can be set in the PC Setup or using the DeviceNet Configurator Explicit message communications can be initiated from the Master to read or write data in any data area in the CPM2C S H CS1 C200HX HG HE Z CVM1 or CV series PC DeviceNet transmission line As a DeviceNet Slave the CPM2C S supports remote I O communications with up to 32 input words and 32 output words as well DeviceNet Slave as explicit message communica tions DeviceNet Slave Expansion I O Units 3 max CPMEC S CompoBus S Slaves Note Refer to the DeviceNet CompoBus D Masters Operation Manual for more de tails on OMRON DeviceNet Masters 14 System Configurations Section 1 2 1 2 5 Adapter Units Peripheral RS 232C Adapter Unit RS 422 RS 232C Adapter Unit VI Unit Conversion Model Peripheral RS 232C Adapter Unit CPU Units communications port gt CPM2C CIF01 Peripheral port RS 232C port RS 422 RS 232C Adapter Unit CPU Units communications port gt CPM2C CIF11 RS422 port RS 232C port Note 1 The CPM2C CIF01 cannot be used with any PC model other than a CPM2C or CPM2C S 2 Although a CPM2C CN111 can be connected to a CPM2C CIF01 it is not possible to use the peripheral port and the RS 232C port on the CPM2C CN111 simultaneously If an attempt is made to use both ports si multaneously it may be impossible to communicate normally and equip ment malfunction may resul
191. erently on the CQM1 PROO1 E and the C200H PRO27 E but the operation of the keys in each pair is identical 168 Using a Programming Console Section 8 3 Mode Switch Contrast Control Buzzer Volume Note To specify the AR area use SHIFT and HR Keys for the C200H PRO27 E and use SHIFT and AR HR Keys for the CQM1 PRO01 E CQM1H PROO1 E A shift symbol will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen when the Shift Key is pressed The shift input can be cleared by pressing the Shift Key again gt 7 Shift input ser gt epee The mode switch controls the CPM2C S operating mode The key can be re moved when the switch is set to RUN or MONITOR but it cannot be removed when the switch is set to PROGRAM The display contrast can be adjusted with the control on the right side of the Pro gramming Console Contrast control The C200H PRO27 E s buzzer volume can be adjusted with the lever on the right side of the Programming Console The buzzer volume cannot be adjusted on the CQM1 PRO01 E and CQM1H PROO1 E Low volume High volume C200H PRO27 E Note The buzzer volume can be turned on and off with a key operation See 8 4 4 Buzzer Operation for details 8 3 3 Changing the CPM2C S Mode with the Mode Switch Once the Programming Console has been connected its mode switch can be used to change the CPM2C S operating mode The mode display lt PRO GRAM gt lt
192. erve as flags to PC operation or contain present and set val ues for various functions Words SR 253 to SR 255 are read only For details on the various bit functions refer to 2 2 SR Area When a complex ladder diagram cannot be programmed in mnemonic code just as it is these bits are used to temporarily store ON OFF execution conditions at program branches They are used only for mnemonic code When programming directly with ladder diagrams using the SYSMAC Support Software SSS or the SYSMAC CPT Support Software TR bits are automatically processed for you The same TR bits cannot be used more than once within the same instruction block but can be used again in different instruction blocks The ON OFF status of TR bits cannot be monitored from a Programming Device Examples showing the use of TR bits in programming are provided in the CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 Programming Manual W353 These bits retain their ON OFF status even after the PC power supply has been turned off or when operation begins or stops They are used in the same way as work bits These bits mainly serve as flags related to PC operation These bits retain their status even after the PC power supply has been turned off or when operation begins or stops For details on the various bit functions refer to 4 5 AR Area These bits are used to exchange data when the CPM2C S is linked 1 1 with another CPM2C S or a CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 CQM1 CQM1H C2
193. estination node number command Specify the node number of the CPM2C S containing the desired data in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal Service code command response Specify 1D Hex in the command The leftmost bit of the service code is turned ON in the response so 9D Hex is returned Class ID command Always 2F Hex 123 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 WRITE WORD DATA Instance ID command Specify the data area containing the desired data in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal Use one of the codes listed in the following table Code Area name Address range 01 Hex IR area IR 000 to IR 049 02 Hex IR area IR 200 to IR 227 03 Hex DM area DM 0000 to DM 2047 04 Hex LR area LR 00 to LR 15 05 Hex HR area HR 00 to HR 19 06 Hex AR area AR 00 to AR 23 read area only 07 Hex Timer Counter area TC 000 to TC 255 Address L and Address H command Specify the starting word address of the read data in hexadecimal as follows Address L The rightmost two digits of the 4 digit starting address Address H The leftmost two digits of the 4 digit starting address Number of words command Specify the number of words of data to read in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal The allowed range is 01 to 64 Hex which is equivalent to 1 to 100 decimal Number of bytes received response Indicates the number of bytes of data in hexadecimal from the source node number
194. etails of operations for the WS02 CXPC1 E CX Programmer Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install and operate the CPM2C S Section 1 describes the special features and functions of the CPM2C S shows the possible system con figurations and outlines the steps required before operation Read this section first when using the CPM2C S for the first time Section 2 provides the technical specifications of the CPM2C S CPU Unit Adapter Units and AC Power Supply Unit and describes the main components of these Units Section 3 provides information on installing and wiring a CPM2C S PC Be sure to follow the directions and precautions in this section when installing the CPM2C S in a panel or cabinet wiring the power sup ply or wiring I O Section 4 describes the structure of the CPM2C S memory areas and explains how to use them Section 5 explains how to exchange data with CompoBus S Slaves when using the CPM2C S as a Com poBus S Master Section 6 explains how to exchange data with a CPM2C S100C DRT or CPM2C S110C DRT DeviceNet Master Section 7 explains the cycle time and I O response time in CPM2C S PCs Refer to this section when writing the user program to improve operation and reduce response delays Section 8 outlines the operations possible with the SYSMAC CPT SYSMAC Support Software SSS and the Programming Consoles Section 9 describes procedures for test runs
195. evant PC manual 10 1 2 Precautions e Do not attempt to use the CPM1 EMU01 V1 for any applications other than those described here Doing so may result in malfunction e Do not attempt to upload or download data between different types of PC Do ing so may result in malfunction e Do not download when the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode If downloading is performed when the PC is running it will automatically switch to PROGRAM mode and operation will stop e Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify the CPM1 EMU01 V1 Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction fire or electric shock e After downloading has been completed be sure to confirm the user program data and expansion instruction information Not doing so may result in faulty operation 222 Specifications and Nomenclature Section 10 2 e Before touching the EEPROM or the CPM1 EMU01 V1 first touch a grounded metallic object to discharge any static build up Not doing so may result in mal function or damage 10 2 Specifications and Nomenclature 10 2 1 Specifications Item Specifications Supported PCs CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C CPM2C S SRM1 V2 CQM1 CQM1H Read Write memory User program 15 2 Kwords max areas Data memory DM 6144 to DM 6655 Read only DM and PC Setup Expansion instructions 18 instructions Connector Connector compatible with peripheral port of CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A SRM1 V2 and CQM1 PCs For CPM2C CPM2C S and CQM1H PCs
196. g 21 CPM2C S Structure and Operation Section 1 3 Interrupt Program Execution N Caution Immediate Refreshing 22 When an interrupt is generated during execution of the main program main pro gram execution is interrupted immediately and the interrupt program is execut ed The following diagram shows the cyclic operation of the CPM2C S when an interrupt program is executed Normally the results of interrupt program execution are transferred to I O memory just after program execution during I O refreshing but IORF 97 can be used to refresh a specified range of I O words during execution of the inter rupt program The specified range of I O words will be refreshed when IORF 97 is executed The normal cycle time is extended by the time required for execution of the inter rupt program Refer to Section 7 Cycle Time and I O Response Time for more details and pre cautions on the cycle time Overseeing processes Main program Cycle time I O refreshing RS 232C port servicing Peripheral port servicing Although IORF 97 can be used in interrupt subroutines you must be careful of the interval between IORF 97 executions If IORF 97 is executed too fre quently a fatal system error may occur FALS 9F stopping operation The inter val between executions of IORF 97 should be at least 1 3 ms total execution time of the interrupt subroutine IORF 97 can be executed in the program to refresh a sp
197. g breakers to prevent short circuits in external wiring When conducting any of the following operations turn OFF the power to the PC Electrocution product damage and malfunction may result e Connecting or disconnecting Expansion I O Units Expansion Units and CPU Units e Assembling Units e Connecting cables and wiring e Connecting or disconnecting connectors e Replacing the battery 3 1 3 Interlock and Limit Circuits N WARNING Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits i e not in the Programmable Controller to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC operation Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious accidents The following diagram shows an example of an interlock circuit Interlock Circuit protect ce x 01005 O t CPM2C S MC2 i i Motor forward 1 i 01006 t__MG1 3 Motor reverse In the interlock circuit above MC1 and MC2 can t be ON at the same time even if CPM2C S outputs 01005 and 01006 are both ON an incorrect PC operation 52 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 2 Selecting an Installation Site The CPM2C S is resistant to harsh conditions and highly reliable but installing the PC in a favorable site will maximize its reliability and operating lifetime Z N Caution Be sure to in
198. gram Write END 01 at the end of the program O BUS ERR Co An error has occurred during data transfer between the CPU Unit and an Expansion I O Unit or Expansion Unit Check the Unit s connecting cable O UNIT OVER E1 Too many Expansion Units or Expansion I O Units more than 5 have been connected Check the Unit configuration Do not connect more than 3 Expansion Units or Expansion I O Units SYS FAIL FALS 01 to 99 A FALS 07 instruction has been executed in the program Check the FALS number to is 01 to 99 or 9F determine the conditions that caused execution correct the cause and clear the error 9F The cycle time has exceeded the Maximum Watch Cycle Time setting DM 6618 Check the cycle time and adjust the Maximum Cycle Time setting if necessary 9 3 Programming Console Operation Errors The following error messages may appear when performing operations on the Programming Console Correct the error as indicated and continue operation Message Meaning and appropriate response REPL ROM An attempt was made to write to write protected memory Set bits 00 to 03 of DM 6602 to 0 PROG OVER The instruction at the last address in memory is not NOP 00 Erase all unnecessary instructions after END 01 ADDR OVER An address was set that is larger than the highest memory address in Program Memory Input a smaller address SETDATA FALS 00 has been input and 00 cannot be input Reinput
199. gs 01 Hex I O area 1 IR 000 to IR 049 CPM2C S Master I O area 2 IR 200 to IR 227 DM area DM 0000 to DM 2047 LR area LR 00 to LR 15 HR area HR 00 to HR 19 AR area AR 00 to 23 08 to 15 Number of bytes 01 to 40 Hex equivalent to 0 to 64 decimal DM 6609 00 to 15 Starting word address 0000 to 07FF Hex equivalent to 0000 to 2047 decimal DM 6610 to 00 to 15 Not used Not used DM 6614 Note The startup operating mode will be as shown in the following table if bits 08 to 15 of DM 6600 are set to 00 Connected Startup operating mode Programming Device DIP switch pin 4 ON DIP switch pin 4 OFF None PROGRAM RUN Programming Console Mode set on Programming Console mode switch Other Device PROGRAM Word s Bit s Function Cycle Time Settings DM 6615 to DM 6619 The following settings are read by the CPU when program execution is started DM 6615 00 to 15 Not used DM 6616 00 to 07 Servicing time for RS 232C port Effective when bits 08 to 15 are set to 01 00 to 99 BCD Percentage of cycle time used to service RS 232C port 08 to 15 RS 232C port servicing setting enable 00 Hex 5 of the cycle time 01 Hex Use time in bits 00 to 07 DM 6617 00 to 07 Servicing time for peripheral port Effective when bits 08 to 15 are set to 01 00 to 99 BCD Percentage of cycle time used to service peripheral 08 to 15 Peripheral
200. he CPM2C S One to N Host Link Up to 32 OMRON PGs including CPM2C S PCs can be connected to a host Connection computer IBM PC AT or compatible Connecting Cable computer XW2Z 200S V 2 m XW2Z 500S V 5 m B500 AL004 or NT AL001 requires 5 V See notes 1 and 2 RS 422 Total length 500 m max When using the port as a peripheral port CPM2C S CPU Unit CPM2C S CPM2C S CPU Unit CPU Unit CPM2 ClF11 CPM2 ClIF 11 When using the port 4 NT ALOO1 Krd NT AL001 M NEAL as an RS 232C port L See note 1 O See note 1 See note 1 RS 232C port M A220701 0 7 m E Xxw2Z 070T 1 0 7 m 5 XW2Z 200T 1 2m CPM2C S amp AWAZ 200 Tiam CPM2C S CPM2C S gt B RS 232C port CPU Unit CPU Unit T RS 232C port CPU Unit XW2Z 070T 1 0 7 m Be CPM2C CN111 E i CSW1 CN118 Con XW2Z 200T 1 2 m H x Connecting Cable EE necting Cable 0 1 m oa 0 15 m CPM2 ClIF01 Up to 32 PCs Note 1 The NT ALOO1 must be supplied externally with 5 VDC When an NT AL001 is connected to a CPM2C S PC pin 6 of the CPM2C S RS 232C port sup plies 5 VDC and an external power supply is not necessary 2 The B500 AL004 requires an external AC power supply 110 VAC or 220 VAC 3 Be sure that the power supply requirements of the CPU Unit Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units do not exceed the available capacity Also take into account the power consumption of the NT ALO01 Adapter when an NT
201. he Unit 1O D QVEIVIEW innean inara Peas Cot aie ae hate Deane alee Ne hee Gale OR 10 1 1 Memory Areas 10 122 Precautions ean ss 503g 84 Sd AE eh gee a haem Sele Se aR AL ee ad 10 2 Specifications and Nomenclature 10 2 1 Specifications 10 2 2 Nomenclature 1023 Handing vnc sheets ee ed ee es See Se eee plea oe ee 10 3 1 Mounting Removing EEPROM 10 3 2 PC Connections srry megs edn totes ede Sa oh Rade hence bee eare 10 3 3 Uploading Programs 0 0 0 eee eee eens 10 3 4 Downloading Programs 221 Overview Section 10 1 10 1 Overview The CPM1 EMU01 V1 Expansion Memory Unit is a program loader for small size or micro PCs Using the CPM1 EMU01 V1 simple on site transfer of user programs and data memory between PCs is possible Uploading Downloading Aho A d ip CPM2C CN111 paea EEPROM L CS1W CN114 2 U i Expansion Memory Unit CPM2C CIF01 Note The PLC in the DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button indicates PCs Programmable Controllers 10 1 1 Memory Areas The memory areas that are uploaded or downloaded vary with the button used as shown in the following table Button UPLOAD DM UPLOAD DOWNLOAD TO PLC Ladder program Read from PC to Read from PC to All contents of and expansion EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM written instructions to PC DM 6144 to 6655 Not affected Note For details on program size DM area and the availability of expansion instruc tions refer to the rel
202. he same Programming Devices such as Programming Consoles and Support Software can be used for the C200H C200HS C200HX HG HE CQM1 CQM1H CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C and SRM1 V2 PCs so existing ladder program resources can be used effectively Built in Motor Control Capability Synchronized Pulse Control High speed Counters and Interrupts Easy Position Control with Pulse Outputs Synchronized pulse control provides an easy way to synchronize the operation of a peripheral piece of equipment with the main equipment The output pulse frequency can be controlled as some multiple of the input pulse frequency al lowing the speed of a peripheral piece of equipment such as a supply conveyor to be synchronized with the speed of the main piece of equipment CPM2C S Motor driver Motor g Hm Encoder n TE Pulses are output as a fixed multiple of the input frequency The CPM2C S has a two kinds of high speed counter inputs The high speed counter input has a response frequency of 20 kHz 5 kHz and the interrupt inputs in counter mode have a response frequency of 2 kHz e The single high speed counter can be used in any one of the four input modes differential phase mode 5 kHz pulse plus direction input mode 20 kHz up down pulse mode 20 kHz or increment mode 20 kHz Interrupts can be trig gered when the count matches a set value or falls within a specified range One high speed counter can be used e Th
203. i ts ee oe g CPM2C CN111 Expansion Memory Unit i a EEPROM F CS1W CN114 Indicator DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button CPM2C CIF01 Handling Section 10 3 Operation Procedure CPMI EMUOILVI Au Mount the EEPROM to the i CPM1 EMU01 V1 before downloading fee oS Soe a wer aiete lot Se Seta Sikes So Change the mode of the PC to PRO Citing feast OS Ap oe GRAN mode Confirm the safety of the system Connect the CPM1 EMU01 V1 to the fe hie xe eee L ie Ak ed Shot erg ees i PC s peripheral port Confirm the orientation of the connector before connecting the CPM1 EMU01 V1 teen i CCCI IE Me MIAO Nestea in Note If the indicator is not lit at all lit red or 3 blinks red downloading will not be See the note on the right possible In this case check the fol lowing items Yes Press the DOWNLOAD TO PLC But ton Check if the indicator is blinking green indicating that downloading has started els the connector properly con nected e Is the EEPROM properly mounted e Are the EEPROM specifications cor rect e Are the peripheral port communica tions settings correct See the note above Check if the indicator is lit green indicating that downloading has been successfully completed Yes Remove the Expansion Memory Unit from the PC See the note above poo ee ee ee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee Before actual operation check the contents of the lad
204. ible in PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before beginning to program for the first time or when installing a new program clear all areas The following procedure is used to clear memory completely including the pro gram all data areas counter PVs Data Memory and the PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 1 Bring up the initial display by pressing the CLR Key repeatedly 2 Press the SET NOT and then the RESET Key to begin the operation i 3 Press the MONTR Key to clear memory completely MONTR The PC Setup DM 6600 through DM 6655 will be cleared when this operation is performed It is possible to retain the data in specified areas or part of the Program Memory To retain the data in the HR TC or DM Areas press the appropriate key after pressing SET NOT and RESET Any data area that still appears on the display will be cleared when the MONTR Key is pressed The HR Key is used to specify both the AR and HR Areas the CNT Key is used to specify the entire timer counter area and the DM Key is used to specify the DM Area It is also possible to retain a portion of the Program Memory from the first memory address to a specified address After designating the data areas to be retained specify the first Program Memory address to be cleared For example input 030 to leave addresses 000 to 029 untouched but to clear addresses from 030 to the end of Program Memory As an example follow
205. ified in the operation manual Improper installa tion of the Unit may result in malfunction XV Application Precautions 5 e When transporting the Units use special packing boxes Be careful not to ap ply excessive vibration or shock during transportation and not to drop the prod uct e Store the Units within the following temperature and humidity ranges Storage temperature 20 to 75 C storage humidity 10 to 90 with no icing or condensation 6 EC Directives 6 1 Applicable Directives e EMC Directives e Low Voltage Directive 6 2 Concepts EMC Directives OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the overall machine The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards see the following note Whether the products conform to the stan dards in the system used by the customer however must be checked by the customer EMC related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc tives will vary depending on the configuration wiring and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed The cus tomer must therefore perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards Note Applicable EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility standards are as follows EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility EN61131 2
206. ill be displayed A Note Refer to 9 4 Programming Errors for details on check levels and the errors that may be detected when the program is checked 4 Press the SRCH Key to continue the search The next error will be dis played Continue pressing the SRCH Key to continue the search The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program Memory is reached A display like this will appear if the end of Program Memory is reached SRCH A display like this will appear if an END instruction is reached SRCH No more errors exist if the END instruction is displayed If errors are displayed edit the program to correct the errors and check the pro gram again Continue checking the program by pressing the SRCH Key again until all errors have been corrected 8 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor This operation is used to monitor the status of up to 16 bits and words although only 3 can be shown on the display at any one time Operation is possible in any mode 182 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 Program Read then Monitor Bit Monitor Word Monitor 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 amp the ae u to bogin eae 4 Press the CLR Key to end monitoring 3 Press the CLR Key to end monitoring 3 a the MONTR a to begin monitoring RUN MONITOR PROGRAM When a program address is being displayed the status of the bit or wor
207. in connector FCN 360C024C 62 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Connecting I O Connectors Use the following procedure when connecting a pressure connector Pressure Connectors 1 2 3 1 Align the connector and insert it into the Unit Flat blade screwdriver Connecting I O Connectors Use the following procedure when connecting a soldered connector Soldered Connectors 1 2 3 1 Align the connector and insert it into the Unit Phillips screwdriver 63 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Assembling Soldered Use the following procedure when wiring and assembling a soldered connector Connectors OMRON C500 CE241 1 2 3 1 Slide heat shrink tubing over the power supply wires and solder the wires to the appropriate pins on the socket is Heat shrink tubing Power supply wires Connector 2 After soldering all of the pins slide the heat shrink tubing over the soldered power supply pins and shrink the tubing by heating it with a heat gun Heat shrink tubing 3 Assemble the socket and connector as shown in the following diagram Connector cover t Small screws 3 Small screws 2 f me Cable clamp Socket e7 a ir Nuts 3 Connector screws Ai Nuts 2 64 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 5 Using Terminal Blocks We recommend using the following Terminal Blocks to wire devices to the CPM2C S I O connector Refer to 3 4 6 Co
208. ink no protocol serial 1 1 Link and 1 1 NT Link communications System Configurations Section 1 2 e Connect up to 3 Expansion Units such as CPM2C series Analog I O Units Temperature Sensor Units or CompoBus S I O Link Units for CompoBus S Slave functions CompoBus S Master Functions Up to 32 CompoBus S Slaves can be connected to create a Remote I O Link with up to 256 I O points It is easy to build an efficient long range distributed system with less wiring by connecting CompoBus S I O Terminals Analog Ter minals Sensor Terminals and Bit Chain Terminals Example System Configuration CS1 C200HX HE HG CVM1 or CV series PC DeviceNet transmission line As a DeviceNet Slave the CPM2C S supports remote I O communications with up to 32 input words and 32 output words as well as explicit message communications ae DeviceNet Slave DeviceNet Slave Expansion I O Unit 3 max vo control interrupt in puts high speed count ers pulse outputs syn chronized pulse control and analog I O CompoBus S transmission line aoe CompoBus S Slaves CPM2C S As a CompoBus S Master the CPM2C S can control remote I O up to 256 points on Slaves I O control and analog I O DeviceNet Slave Functions DRT Models Only When the CPM2C S is used as a DeviceNet Slave an I O Link of up to 1 024 points 512 inputs and 512 outputs can be cr
209. ions CPM2C SRT21 CompoBus S O Allocates I O 8 inputs and 8 outputs to the Link Unit CPM2C S for use as a CompoBus S Slave AC Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 AC Power Supply Input 100 to 240 VAC Unit Output 24 VDC 600 mA 232 Standard Models Communications Port Connecting Cables Description Converts the CPM2C S CPU Unit s communications port to a peripheral port and RS 232C port Connector CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable Appendix A Cable length 0 15 m about 4 CS1W CN114 Connecting Cable Converts the CPM2C S CPU Unit s communications port to a peripheral port 0 05 m about 2 CS1W CN118 Connecting Cable Programming Console Converts the CPM2C S CPU Unit s communications port to an RS 232C port Model Number CQM1H PROO1 E to the CPM2C S 0 1 m about 2 Specifications 2 m Connecting Cable attached The CQM1H PROO1 E can be connected directly CQM1 PRO01 E 2 m Connecting Cable attached C200H PRO27 E Hand held w backlight requires one of the Connecting Cables listed below C200H CN222 Connects the C200H PRO27 E toa 2 mcable C200H CN422 peripheral port 4 m cable CS1W CN224 Connects the C200H PRO27 E 2 m cable directly to the CPM2C S CPU Unit s CS1W CN624 communications port 6 m cable CX Programmer WS02 CXPC1 E For MS Windows 95 98 CD ROM SYSM
210. ions is used in the program an error will occur when the program is transferred from the PC to the computer The input word for the frequency for PWM must be between IR 000 and IR 049 or between IR 200 and IR 252 If a CQM1 instruction that is not supported by the CPM2C S is used in the pro gram an error will occur when the program is transferred from the computer to the PC 157 SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 8 1 Error Log PC Setup The error log cannot be displayed If data has been written to DM 6569 to DM 6599 however this data will be incorrectly displayed as the error log Do not use the information that is displayed Some of the CPM2C S PC Setup settings are different from those in the CQM1 so not all settings can be made from the menus These settings have to be made by writing data directly to the word containing the setting 8 1 3 Using the SYSMAC CPT Support Software Starting the Software 1 2 3 This section shows how to perform basic SYSMAC CPT Support Software op erations with the CPM2C S PC The software is operating in a Windows 95 en vironment in these examples The SYSMAC CPT Support Software is a Windows 3 1 Windows 98 Windows NT 8 5 4 0 application Refer to the SYSMAC CPT Support Software User Manual W333 for details on computer requirements and the software installa tion procedure 1 Select Programs P from the Start Menu SYSMAC CPT and then SYSMAC CPT
211. is the number of bytes from D 3 to the end D 3 029C Slave s node number 02 Hex READ BYTE DATA response service code 9C Hex D 4 HHLL These words contain the data read from slave words IR 010 to to IR 029 When the READ BYTE DATA command is executed f from an OMRON Master the bytes are stored in the same L D 23 HH LL order HH LL in which they were stored in the Slave Contents Function Hex C 00 0B Number of bytes of command data beginning with word S OB Hex specifies 11 bytes C 1 00 30 Number of bytes of response data beginning with word D 30 Hex specifies 48 bytes C 2 0001 Destination network address 01 Hex C 3 3F FE Master s node number 3F Hex specifies 63 Master s unit address FE Hex specifies the local Unit C 4 0000 Response required Transmission port number 00 Hex specifies 0 Number of retries 00 Hex specifies 0 C 5 0064 Response monitoring time 64 Hex specifies 10 0 seconds CS1 CVM1 and CV series PCs Writing Data with CMND 194 This example shows the instruction operands and results when 20 words of data are written through a Master mounted in a CS1 CVM1 or CV series PC to words IR 010 to IR 029 in a Slave For details on explicit messages refer to the CS1 Series DeviceNet Unit Opera tion Manual W380 for CS1 series PCs and refer to the DeviceNet Compo Bus D Operation Manual W267 for CVM1 and CV series PCs For details on CMN
212. it and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PC System to the above mentioned applications Safety Precautions N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING Connect the ground terminal of the Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 to a ground or 100 Q or less Not doing so may result in electric shock Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify any Units Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction fire or electric shock Provide safety measures in external circuits i e not in the Programmable Controller including the following items in order to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC operation Not doing so may result in serious accidents e Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits Application Precaution
213. ith the PC System Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installa tion and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system Application Precautions N WARNING Z N Caution Observe the following precautions when using the PC System Always heed these precautions Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury e Always connect to a ground such that the grounding resistance does not ex ceed 100 Q when installing the Units Not connecting to the correct ground may result in electric shock e Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the fol lowing Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock e Assembling the Units e Connecting or disconnecting the Expansion I O Units or Expansion Units e Connecting or wiring the cables e Connecting or disconnecting the connectors e Setting DIP switches e Replacing the battery Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the PC or the system or could damage the PC or PC Units Always heed these pre cautions e Fail safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect missing or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines momentary power interruptions or other causes e Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety
214. l 24 pin crimp Housing Fujitsu FCN 363J024 equivalent C500 CE242 connector and cover Contacts Fujitsu FCN 363J AU equivalent Cover Fujitsu FCN 360C024 J2 equivalent a on 24 pin pressure Connector Fujitsu FON 367J024 AU F equivalent C500 CE243 mE connector Connector Specifications Fujitsu Item Soldered jack Specifications 24 pin gold plated terminals Model number FCN 361J024 AU Crimp Crimp jack housing 24 pin FCN 363J024 connector Crimp contacts For wire gauges 24 AWG to 28 AWG FCN 363J AU Hand crimp tool FCN 363T T005 H Contact removal tool FCN 360T T001 H Pressure Pressure jack with closed 24 pin gold plated terminals FCN 367J024 AU F connector end cover 24 pin silver plated terminals FCN 367J024 AG F Pressure jack with open end 24 pin gold plated terminals FCN 367J024 AU H Cable cutter General purpose CONST 24 pin silver plated terminals FCN 367J024 AG H Pressing Hand press General purpose FCN 707T T101 H tools FCN 707T T001 H Locator plate For the 360 series connectors FCN 367T T012 H Connector cover Not compatible with the closed end cover pressure jack Thin slanted cover for 24 pin connector FCN 360C024 J2 With slotted screws for 24 pin connector Can be turned by hand FCN 360C024E With Phillips head screws for 24 pin connector FCN 360C024B With intermediate Phillips nead screws for 24 p
215. l computer Operating Modes The operating mode of the CPM2C S when the power is turned ON depends upon the PC Setup settings in DM 6600 the setting of DIP switch pin 4 and the connected Programming Device See 1 3 3 Operating Mode at Startup for de tails The CMP2C S has three operating modes PROGRAM MONITOR and RUN When the CPT is offline the CPM2C S will operate in PROGRAM mode When the CPT is online the CPM2C S operating mode can be controlled from the CPT PROGRAM Mode The CPM2C S program isn t executed in PROGRAM mode Use PROGRAM mode to create and edit the program clear memory or check the program for errors MONITOR Mode The CPM2C S program is executed in MONITOR mode and I O is processed just as it is in RUN mode Use MONITOR mode to test system operations such as monitoring CPM2C S operating status force setting and resetting I O bits changing the SV PV of timers and counters changing word data and online editing RUN Mode This is the CPM2C S normal operating mode The CPM2C S operating status can be monitored from a Programming Device but bits can t be force set force reset and the SV PV of timers and counters can t be changed SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 8 1 Switching to Online Operation The SYSMAC CPT Support Software must make an online connection in order to communicate with the CPM2C S transfer the program or change the CPM2C S operating mode 1 2 3 1 Sel
216. l error All CPU Unit indicators will be OFF for the power interruption error For all other fatal operating errors the POWER and ERR ALM indicators will be lit The RUN indicator will be OFF Message Meaning and appropriate response Power interruption None Power has been interrupted for more than 10 ms 2 ms for DC power types no message Check power supply voltage and power lines Try to power up again MEMORY ERR F1 AR 1308 ON There is a non existent bit or word address in the user program Check the program and correct errors AR 1309 ON An error has occurred in flash memory Replace the CPU Unit AR 1310 ON A checksum error has occurred in read only DM DM 6144 to DM 6599 Check and correct the settings in the read only DM area AR 1311 ON A checksum error has occurred in the PC Setup Initialize the PC Setup and input the settings again AR 1312 ON A checksum error has occurred in the program Check the program and correct any errors detected AR 1313 ON A checksum error has occurred in the expansion instructions data and all function codes have been set the their default values Reset the expansion instructions AR 1314 ON Data was not maintained in an area specified for holding Clear the error check the data in the areas specified for holding and try again AR 1315 ON A CompoBus S Master ASIC error occurred Replace the CPM2C S NO END INST FO END 01 is not written in the pro
217. le time calculation Wait until minimum cycle time has elapsed if a minimum cycle time is set in DM 6619 of PC Setup Calculate of cycle time Negligible except for the delay itself when re quired CompoBus S output refreshing Write output data to CompoBus S Master ASIC Start CompoBus S communications I O output refresh ing Write output data results of executing pro gram to output bits I O input refreshing Read input data from input bits 0 05 ms CPM2C S CPU Unit 0 06 ms Expansion I O Unit 0 3 ms DeviceNet I O re freshing Write output data to DeviceNet interface and read input data 0 1 ms RS 232C port serv icing Communications processing when a Program ming Device or Communications Adapter is connected to the RS 232C port 0 55 ms min 5 or less of cycle time up to 131 ms The percentage of cycle time allocated to RS 232C servicing can be set in DM 6616 Peripheral port serv icing Service device connected to peripheral port when a Programming Device or Adapter is con nected 0 55 ms min 5 or less of cycle time up to 131 ms The percentage of cycle time allocated to pe ripheral port servicing can be set in DM 6617 DeviceNet commu nications servicing Perform communications processing explicit message communications with the DeviceNet Master Note 65 536 ms max 1 The CPM2C S starts I O refreshing after CompoBus S comm
218. leftmost word on the display and press the CHG Key if more changes will be made Input the new value and press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory if no more changes will be made B i 4 Input the new value for the middle word on the display and press the CHG Key if the rightmost word will be changed Input the new value and press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory if the rightmost word will not be ae In this case it will reel Note Ifthe CLR ag is Ce before the WRITE Key the operation will be cancelled and the 3 word monitor display will return without any changes in data memory 8 4 19 Changing Timer Counter SV There are two operations that can be used to change the SV of a timer or counter They are possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only In MON ITOR mode the SV can be changed while the program is being executed RUN MONITOR PROGRAM The timer or counter SV can be changed either by inputting a new value or by incrementing or decrementing the current SV Inputting a New SV This operation can be used to input a new SV constant as well as to change an Constant SV from a constant to a word address designation and vice versa The following examples show how to input a new SV constant and how to change the SV from a constant to an address 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Display the desired timer or counter B 3 Press the Down Arrow eel
219. lendar Clock Shows the current year month day of the week day of the month hour minute and second Expansion Unit functions Analog I O functions using CPM2C MAD11 Analog I O Unit e Two analog inputs Input range of 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA e One analog output Output range of 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Temperature sensing functions using CPM2C TS001 101 Temperature Sensor Unit e Thermocouple input measurement range K 200 to 1 300 C K 0 0 to 500 0 C J 100 to 850 C J 0 0 to 400 0 C e Platinum resistance thermometer measurement range Pt100 200 0 to 650 0 C JPt100 200 0 to 650 0 C CompoBus S Slave functions using CPM2C SRT21 CompoBus S I O Link Unit Data exchange with the Master Unit via 8 inputs and 8 outputs Note 1 This input is shared by the high speed counter and synchronized pulse con trol functions 2 This output is shared by the pulse output and synchronized pulse control functions 1 2 System Configurations 1 2 1 CPU Units and AC Power Supply Units CPM2C S CPU Units CPM2C S100C CPM2C S100C DRT CPM2C S110C CPM2C S110C DRT Inputs Outputs Model CPU Unit with CompoBus S Master 6 24 VDC inputs 4 sinking transistor outputs CPM2C S100C Functions 4 sourcing transistor outputs CPM2C S110C CPU Unit with CompoBus S Master 4 sinking transistor outputs CPM2C S100C DRT
220. ls 3 Wiring e Wire the power supply and I O devices 29 Preparation for Operation Section 1 6 e Wire the DeviceNet transmission line e Wire the CompoBus S transmission line e Connect communications devices if necessary e Connect the Programming Console Refer to 3 4 Wiring and Connections 8 3 Using a Programming Console for details 4 Initial Settings e Set the DeviceNet node number and communications speed with the rotary and DIP switches on the front of the CPU Unit e Set the Communications Switches on the front of the CPU Unit if neces sary The switches must be set when a device other than the Program ming Console is connected or the standard communications settings are not used e Connect the Programming Console set the mode switch to PROGRAM mode and turn ON the PC e Check the CPU Units LED indicators and the Programming Console s dis play e Clear the PC s memory All Clear e Make PC Setup settings Refer to 3 3 Installing CPM2C S and 8 3 4 Preparation for Operation for de tails 5 Create Ladder Program e Create a ladder program to control the system Refer to Section 8 Using Programming Devices and the Programming Manual for details 6 Write Ladder Program in PC e Write the ladder program in the PC with the Programming Console or transfer the program to the PC from the Support Software Refer to Section 8 Using Programming Devices to the SYSMAC Support Software Operati
221. m CPM2C CIF11 XW2Z 200T 1 2 m Note The Programmable Terminal cannot be connected using a peripheral port con nection when communicating via an NT Link 78 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 12 One to one PC Link Connections A CPM2C S can be linked to another CPM2C S a CQM1H CQM1 CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 C200HS or C200HX HG HE PC The PC must be connected using the communications port as an RS 232C port not as a peripheral port 1 1 Link Master RS 232C port D sub 9 pin RS 232C port D sub 9 pin 1 1 Link Slave CPM2C S CPU Unit a aj J EI CPM2C S CPU Unit oe y ae E n T Sif F 5 is Pi CPM2C CN111 HH CPM2C CN111 0 1 m 0 1m gt Connecting Cable z E XW2Z 200T 2 m a or oe XW2Z 500T 5 m CS1W CN118 0 1 m Mm CPM2C CIF01 CPM2C CIF11 OMRON PC CQM1H CQM1 CPM1 OMRON PC CQM1H CQM1 CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 C200HS or C200HX HG HE C200HS or C200HX HG HE Note Even though the peripheral port on the CPM2C CIF01 can output RS 232C this port cannot be used for one to one link communications 79 SECTION 4 Memory Areas This section describes the structure of the CPM2C S memory areas and explains how to use them 4 1 Allocation of Word and Bit Addresses 0 0 0c eee 4 1 1 FUNCHONS asena BO EASE SoA SA Raw SRA RR RASS Oa side Bes 4 1 2 I O Memory Area Attributes 0 ee eee 4 2 I O Allo
222. m shaded areas indicate bits actually used for inputs or outputs 6 inputs IR 00000 to IR 00005 4 outputs IR 01000 to IR 01003 Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 IR 000 Do not use IR 010 Inputs Outputs 4 2 2 Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units Up to 3 Expansion Units or Expansion I O Units can be connected to a CPM2C S PC Input bits and output bits are automatically allocated starting from the CPU Unit and continuing through Expansion Units and Expansion O Units in the order in which they are connected The input area consists of the 10 words from IR 000 to 009 and the output area consists of the 10 words from IR 010 to 019 No of I O Model number Allocated bits Max No of Units CPM2C 8ED Input 8 inputs Word m 1 bits 00 to 07 Output 16 CPM2C 16ED Input 16 inputs Word m 1 bits 00 to 15 3 Output 8 CPM2C 8ER Input 3 CPM2C 8ET CPM2C 8ET1 Output 8 outputs Word n 1 bits 00 to 07 16 CPM2C 16ET Input 3 CPM2C 16ET1 Output 16 outputs Word n 1 bits 00 to 15 10 CPM2C 10EDR Input 6 inputs Word m 1 bits 00 to 05 3 Output 4 outputs Word n 1 bits 00 to 03 20 CPM2C 20EDR Input 12 inputs W
223. n before actually running it on the Unit Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation e Double check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power sup ply Incorrect wiring or switch settings may result in burning e Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e Changing the operating mode of the PC e Force setting force resetting any bit in memory e Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory e Before touching the Unit be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any static built up Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage e Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit Doing either of these may break the cables e Do not apply forces exceeding 50 N to connector sections e Do not place objects on top of the cables Doing so may break the cables e Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of the DM and HR Areas required for resuming operation Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e When handling the battery never short circuit recharge disassemble heat excessively incinerate or subject the battery to excessive force Subjecting the battery to excessive forces such as dropping the battery on the floor can cause the battery to leak e Install the Unit properly as spec
224. n if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 179 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 2 Input the address from which the search will begin and press the Down Arrow ae It is not necessary to input leading zeroes 3 a Je J to J found and press the SRCH key In this case the search is for OUT 01000 In this case the next OUT 01000 instruction is at address 200 as shown below ouT 1 0 0 0 sRCH 4 Press the Down Arrow Key to display the instruction s operands or press the SRCH Key to search for the next occurrence of the instruction 5 The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program Memory is reached In this case an END instruction was reached at address 397 Indicates the address of END instruction Indicates the amount used by the user program in units of 0 1 Kwords 8 4 9 Bit Operand Search This operation is used to find occurrences of the specified operand bit in the pro gram and is possible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM The ON OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the ae address It is not necessary to input leading zeroes eo 3 Press the Gc E to SEa the search 4 Press the SRCH Key to search for the next occurrence of the ope
225. n to the CPM2C S according to the mnemon ic list in 8 5 2 Example Program The procedure is performed beginning with the initial display Clear the memory before entering a new program Note If an error occurs while inputting the program refer to 9 3 Programming Console Operation Errors for details on correcting the error Refer to the relevant Support Software Operation Manual for details on errors that appear when operating the SSS or SYSMAC CPT Support Software 1 Inputting the Self holding Bit 1 2 3 1 Input the normally open condition IR 00000 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes LD Hr WRITE 2 Input the OR condition IR 20000 SH ICICI E 3 Input the normally closed AND condition C000 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes AND NOT CNT 4 Input the OUT instruction IR 20000 Cc A A A A or Je Je JCe Je J 2 Inputting the One second Timer 1 2 3 1 Input the normally open condition IR 20000 Cc A A A A Beagad g 2 Input the normally closed AND condition T002 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes WRITE 197 Programming Example Section 8 5 3 Input the 1 second timer T001 TIM Ea 4 Input the SV for T001 0010 1 0 s B A i 1 0 WRITE 3 Inputting the The following key operations are used to input th
226. nel installation precautions Programming Console installation password entering on Programming Console PC mode changing PC Setup settings 239 Index PC status indicators Peripheral Devices available models peripheral port servicing time Peripheral Port Error peripheral port servicing time PC Setup settings photoelectric switches preventing false inputs platinum resistance thermometer PNP current output connections position control power consumption power cables power interruption detection power supply interrupt time precautions troubleshooting wiring Power Supply Unit available models components specifications wiring precautions design precautions general output wiring SYSMAC Support Software uploading downloading program memory setting address and reading content Program ming Console PROGRAM mode description program write protection PC Setup settings Programmable Terminal connections programming checking the program checks for syntax Programming Console errors example inserting and deleting instructions Programming Console preparation for procedures searching Programming Console setting and reading a memory address Programming Console Programming Console connections keys models operation errors operations using Programming Devices connections 240 programs checking check levels downloading ente
227. ng CompoBus S Transmission Lines 0 0 0 0 ce eee ee eee 3 4 8 Wiring DeviceNet Communications Cables 0 00000 00 00008 3 4 9 Programming Device Connections 0 cece eee eee eee 3 4 10 No Protocol Communications 00 cece ee eens 3 4 11 OMRON PT Connections 0 0 00 eect eee 3 4 12 One to one PC Link Connections 0 0 e eee eee eee 51 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 1 Design Precautions Observe the following precautions when designing a system incorporating a CPM2C S PC 3 1 1 Power Supply Wiring Separate the power supply wiring from the control system CPM2C S system and DC I O system wiring Separate the control circuits that supply power to the main Unit from the main circuits using dedicated circuit protectors and fuses 3 1 2 Power Supply Voltage N Caution Use the power supply voltages indicated in Section 2 Unit Specifications and Components Failure to adhere to the specifications may result in fire If the power supply voltage falls below 85 of the rated voltage the CPM2C S will stop and all outputs will be turned OFF If low voltage affects the equipment etc provide a protection circuit which shuts OFF the output until the supply volt age returns to the rated value In places where power supply conditions are poor take steps to ensure that power is supplied at the rated voltage Be sure to adhere to safety precautions such as providin
228. nged to RUN or MON ITOR with the mode switch after entering the password CLR Ad p a Indicates the mode set by the mode selector switch 171 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 8 4 Programming Console Operations 8 4 1 Overview The following table lists the programming and monitoring operations that can be performed from a Programming Console Refer to the rest of this section for details on operational procedures Name Function Page Clearing memory Clears all or part of the Program Memory and any data areas that are not 173 read only as well as the contents of the Programming Console s memory Reading clearing error Displays and clears error messages and displays MESSAGE instruction 174 messages messages Buzzer operation Turns on and off the buzzer that sounds when Programming Console keys 174 are pressed Assigning expansion Reads or changes the function codes assigned to expansion instructions 175 instruction function codes Setting a program memory Sets the specified program memory address when reading writing 176 address inserting and deleting programs Reading a program memory Reads the contents of the Program Memory Displays the status of the 176 address currently displayed bit in PROGRAM and MONITOR modes Instruction search Finds occurrences of the specified instruction in the program 179 Bit operand sea
229. nk length Branch length Total branch length 100 m max 50 m max 500 m max 120 m max Communications mode High speed mode Long distance mode e When Special Flat Cable is used Trunk length Branch length Total branch length 30 m max Unrestricted branching up to a total cable length of 200 m max Communications mode High speed mode Long distance mode e Refer to 5 2 Remote I O Communications for a list of compatible Slaves 1 2 3 CPU Unit Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units A series of up to 3 Expansion I O Units or Expansion Units can be connected to the expansion I O connector on the CPU Unit There are three types of Expansion Units available Analog I O Unit Tempera ture Sensor Unit and CompoBus S I O Link Unit Expansion I O Unit or Expansion Unit CPU Unit cPMeC s E Expansion I O Connector output side no cover Expansion I O Connector input side Expansion I O Connector with cover A PC with 82 I O points the maximum can be assembled by connecting three 24 point Expansion I O Units to a CPU Unit CPM2C S100C DRT 6 inputs 4 outputs Vem CPM2C 24EDTC n 16 inputs 8 outputs x 3 Units 54 inputs 28 outputs 11 System Configurations Section 1 2 Expansion I O Units Units with Relay Outputs via Terminal Block 10 I O Points 20 I O Points 8 Output Points id ie SESSSee fol fal ul al ol wl 6A NI
230. nnecting I O Devices for details on I O wiring A Cable Terminal Blocks XW2B 20G4 M3 screws XW2B 20G5 M3 5 screws XW2D 20G6 Thin version Note The allowable current for the XW2Z Ais 1A Do not allow the current on the common terminal to exceed 1 A 3 4 6 Connecting I O Devices N WARNING Note Z N Caution O Configuration Wire inputs and outputs to the CPM2C S CPU Unit as shown in the following diagrams The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposits on or burning of the output relays or destruction of the output transistors External safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious accidents When equipment must conform to the EC Directives Low voltage Directives use a power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation Check that wiring has been performed correctly before supplying power Sup plying power with incorrect wiring may result in damage to internal circuits The following diagrams show the I O configurations 65 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 CPM2C S100C and CPM2C S100C DRT Sinking Transistor Outputs 1 O connector 24 VDC Don t exceed the output capacity or the maximum common current for transistor outputs shown in the following table Po tem Specification Output capacity 300 mA at 24 VDC Maximum common current capacity
231. ntained during power interruptions Memory backup See notes 1 and 2 Flash memory Program read only DM area and PC Setup Memory backup The read write DM area HR area AR area and counter values are backed up The battery has a 2 year lifetime at 25 C and it is replaceable 33 Unit Components Section 2 2 ff alee Specifications Self diagnostic functions CPU Unit failure watchdog timer I O bus error battery error and memory failure Program checks No END instruction programming errors checked when operation is started Note 1 The DM area HR area AR area and counter values are backed up If the backup battery or capacitor is discharged the contents of these areas will be lost and the data values will revert to the defaults 2 The contents of the program area read only DM area DM 6144 to DM 6599 and PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 are stored in flash memory The contents of these areas will be read from flash memory the next time the power is turned ON even if the backup battery or capacitor is discharged When data has been changed in any of these areas write the new values to flash memory by switching the CPM2C S to MONITOR or RUN mode or by turning the power OFF and then ON again 3 Changes made while in MONITOR mode using for example online editing are written to flash memory in real time 34 Unit Components Section 2 2 2 1 3 I O Specifications CPU Unit Input Specifica
232. nts of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion I O Units may operate unex pectedly 1 Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described 8 4 14 Binary Monitor BInary monitor Bit 15 Bit 00 2 Press the CHG Key to begin binary data modification A flashing cursor will appear over bit 15 The cursor indicates which bit can be changed 3 Three sets of keys are used to move the cursor and change bit status a Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the left and right b Use the 1 and 0 Keys to change a bit s status to on or off The cursor will move one bit to the right after one of these keys is pressed B c Use the SHIFT SET and SHIFT RESET Keys to force set or force re set a bit s status The cursor will move one bit to the right after one of these keys is pressed The NOT Key will clear force set or force reset status Note Bits in the DM Area cannot be force set or force reset 4 Press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory and return to the binary monitor L 8 4 22 Signed Decimal Data Modification 190 This
233. o Input bit status l m t t Inputtime constant Use a Programming Device to set the input time constants 105 PC Setup Section 4 6 Input Time Constants for IR 000 Bit 15 0 T T DM 6620 Not used J Time constant for IR 00005 1 digit BCD see below Time constant for IR 00003 to IR 00004 1 digit BCD see below Time constant for IR 00000 to IR 00002 1 digit BCD see below Default 0000 8 ms for each Input Time Constants for IR 001 to IR 009 Bit 15 0 DM 6621 IR 001 and IR 002 T DM 6622 IR 003 and IR 004 DM 6621 to DM 6625 DM 6623 IR 005 and IR 006 DM 6624 IR 007 and IR 008 DM 6625 IR 009 Time constant for IR 002 IR 004 IR 006 and IR 008 Time constant for IR 001 IR 003 IR 005 IR 007 and IR 009 Default 0000 8 ms for each The nine possible settings for the input time constant are shown below Set only the rightmost digit for each setting for IR 000 00 Hex 8 ms 01 Hex 1 ms 02 Hex 2 ms 03 Hex 4 ms 04 Hex 8 ms 05 Hex 16 ms 06 Hex 32 ms07 Hex 64 ms08 Hex 128 ms 4 7 9 Error Log Settings Error Detection and Error Log Operation DM 6655 Make the settings shown below to determine whether or not a non fatal error is to be generated when the cycle time exceeds 100 ms or when the voltage of the built in battery drops and to set the method for storing records in the error log when errors occur Bit 15 0 DM
234. o deterioration of the electrical components making regular maintenance necessary The standard period for maintenance checks is 6 months to 1 year but more fre quent checks are required if the PC is operated in more demanding conditions If the criteria are not met adjust to within the specified ranges Details Determine whether the voltage fluctuation at the power supply terminals is within specifications Criteria Within the voltage variation range see note Remarks Environmental Is the ambient temperature inside the 0 to 55 C Thermometer conditions panel appropriate Is the ambient humidity inside the panel 10 to 90 RH with no Hygrometer appropriate condensation Has dirt or dust collected None Visual inspection I O power supply Is the voltage fluctuation measured atthe Each I O terminal must Tester I O terminals within the standard range conform to the specifications Installation status Are all units securely installed Nothing is loose Phillips screwdriver Are all connection cables and connectors inserted completely and locked Nothing is loose Visual inspection Are any of the external wiring screws loose Nothing is loose Phillips screwdriver Are any of the external wiring cables frayed No external abnormalities Visual inspection Product service life Contact output relay Electrical Resistance load 150 000 operations Inductive load
235. occurred e An unrecognized PC is connected e An EEPROM error EEPROM not present EEPROM defect or no program to download occurred e A checksum error occurred 10 3 Handling 10 3 1 Mounting Removing EEPROM NCaution Do not mount or remove the EEPROM with the CPM1 EMU01 V1 connected to the PC Doing so may damage the EEPROM Mounting EEPROM 1 2 3 1 Lift up the lock lever 2 Straighten the pins on the EEPROM line up with the socket and lower into the socket as shown in the following diagram If the EEPROM is loose place it in the center of the socket EEPROM i 1 Lift up the lock lever 2 Insert the EEPROM 3 Gently hold down the EEPROM and pull down the lock lever Ml 3 Pull down the lock lever a Removing EEPROM Lift up the lock lever and detach the EEPROM 224 Handling Section 10 3 10 3 2 PC Connections N Caution Z N Caution CPM2C S CPM2C and CQM1H PCs CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CQM1 and SRM1 V2 PCs Peripheral Port Communications Settings Disconnecting Note Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1 EMU01 V1 before connecting the CPM1 EMU01 V1 to the PC Do not disconnect the CPM1 EMU01 V1 from the PC when the indicator is blink ing green When connecting to a CPM2C S CPM2C or CQM1H connect to the peripheral port via the CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 Connecting Cable Also set the pins on the CPU Unit s DIP switch as follows CPM2C S Pin 3 ON see note
236. of CPM2C S operation self diagnosis functions and error processing to identify and correct the hardware and software errors that can occur during PC operation Section 10 describes how to use the CPM1 EMU01 V1 Expansion Memory Unit Follow the handling precautions and procedures to properly use the Unit Appendix A provides tables of CPM2C S Units and related products Appendix B provides the dimensions of CPM2C S CPU Units WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given ix PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller PC and related devices The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Con troller You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PC system 1 Intended A dieic sireno 6 2 0 GAARA OS Bh RY VOD Ons SEEN SOREL a 2 General Precautions sasra kaa nak aap eae Meee ee ee PS ee ee eae Meese AN 3 Safe Precautions rss sp egaied ies nee Sh ale bee eet Reb SRR ha eta E NRR Mee oder 4 Operating Environment Precautions 0 eee eee eee 5 Ap
237. ole to the CPU Unit s communications port peripheral port See 8 3 1 Connecting the Programming Console for details The CPU Unit s Communications Switch setting has no effect on commu nications with the Programming Console Set the mode switch to PROGRAM mode Turn ON the PC Enter the password See 8 3 5 Entering the Password for details Clear All Clear the PC s memory See 8 4 2 Clearing Memory for details Read and clear all errors and messages See 8 4 3 Reading Clearing Error Messages for details 8 Start programming NO oO fB W 8 3 5 Entering the Password To gain access to the PC s programming functions you must first enter the pass word The password prevents unauthorized access to the program The PC prompts you for a password when PC power is turned on or if PC power is already on after the Programming Console has been connected to the PC To gain access to the system when the Password message appears press CLR and then MONTR Then press CLR to clear the display If the Programming Console is connected to the PC when PC power is already on the first display below will indicate the mode the PC was in before the Pro gramming Console was connected Ensure that the PC is in PROGRAM mode before you enter the password When the password is entered the PC will shift to the mode set on the mode switch causing PC operation to begin if the mode is set to RUN or MONITOR The mode can be cha
238. oltage within acceptable limits Yes No Is PWR indicator lit gt gt eS Are there any discon Connect connectors nected connectors or or replace wires broken wires Yes Is PWR indicator lit Replace the CPU End Unit 211 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 9 5 Fatal Error Check 212 RUN indicator not lit Is the ERR ALM indicator lit Determine the cause of the error with a Programming Device Is PC mode displayed on Programming Device Is PC mode displayed on Programming Device Turn the power supply OFF and then ON again Is a fatal error 3 displayed Identify the error eliminate its cause and clear the error Follow the Memory Error Check flowchart if a memory error has occurred Switch to RUN or MONITOR mode Is the RUN indicator lit Unit Replace the CPU Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 9 5 Non fatal Error Check ERR ALM indicator flashing Determine the cause of the error with a Programming Device Is a non fatal error indicated Identify the error eliminate its cause and clear the error Flashing Is the ERR ALM indicator flashing Replace the CPU Unit 213 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 9 5 I O Check The I O check flowchart is based on the following ladder diagram section LS1 LS2 00002 00003 SOL1 01003 SOL1 malfunction Malfun
239. on Manuals and to the CPT User Manual for details 7 Test Run e Check I O wiring in PROGRAM mode e Check and debug program execution in MONITOR mode Refer to Section 9 Test Runs and Error Processing for details 30 SECTION 2 Unit Components and Specifications This section provides the technical specifications of the CPM2C S CPU Unit Adapter Units and AC Power Supply Unit and describes the main components of these Units Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual W356 for descriptions of the specifications and installa tion of Expansion I O Units and refer to the CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 Programmable Controllers Pro gramming Manual W353 for descriptions of the specifications and installation of Expansion Units 221 SSPECHICATONS syo e 36 2 sa ses ne 5 ee og BRE IS Soke E E gk Whee a eRe Bee ee 2 1 1 General Specifications 0 00 eee eee eee 2 1 2 Characteristics sineira kA SS a ee ea Reed ae aR 263 WO Specilicanions aes a as Reels tava ohana eins tite ea oes 2 1 4 AC Power Supply Unit Specifications 0 00 00 ee eee 2 2 Unit Component senri 85 des 8 deh ia An ESOS Kaeo ADA E tas eae eK 2 2 1 CPU Unit Components gt sse ti e628 eh ei eon te oa pate See A 2 2 2 Expansion W O Units 3 4 ck aed area bp i eke Ae Ele ees 2 2 3 AC Power Supply Unit sr afssr esaet nioni Se EEE eee eee 2 2 4 CPM2C CIFO1 Peripheral RS 232C Adapter Unit 00 2 2
240. on after it has been entered simply scroll through the program until the desired instruction is displayed and press the NOT Key The symbol should be displayed next to the instruction Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory The input display for the first operand will be displayed WRITE e Writing Hexadecimal BCD Constant 10 Input the first operand The operands of MOV 21 are normally word addresses but a constant can be input by pressing the CONT Key first When the CONT Key is pressed the display will change to 0000 indicating that a constant can be entered B A A E sooga Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory The input display for the second operand will appear wRITE Note The operands of MOV 21 can be word addresses so the CONT Key must be pressed to input a constant e Writing a Word Address 11 Input the second operand em B A ks LR Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory The next program address will be displayed WRITE Note When the default display value is 000 a word address can be input immediately without pressing the Shift and CH Keys 12 Input the next instruction oda FUN 5 0 Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory wRITE e
241. ons proceed from the master to the slave Master Slave Output LR Input Output k LR 5 The following conditions are taken as examples for calculating the I O response times In CPM2C S PCs LR area words LR 00 to LR 15 are used in 1 1 data links and the transmission time is fixed at 12 ms Input ON delay 10 ms input time constant default setting Master cycle time 10 ms Slave cycle time 15 ms Output ON delay 15 ms Minimum I O Response Time The CPM2C S responds most quickly under the following circumstances 1 2 3 1 The CPM2C S receives an input signal just prior to the input refresh phase of the cycle 2 The Master s communications servicing occurs just as the Master to Slave transmission begins 3 The Slave s communications servicing occurs just after the transmission is completed 152 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 The minimum I O response time Input ON response time Master s cycle time Transmission time Slave s cycle time Output ON response time Input pa I O refresh oint Input ON delay 10 ms Overseeing communications Input servicing etc Master bit i j CPU i Program A processing execution a Master s cycle time 10 ms Master to Slave Transmission time 12 ms CPU Program processing execution Slave gt Output ON Slave s cycle time 15 ms del
242. or outputs Sourcing CPM2C 8ET1C 16 output points 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 16ETC 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 16ET1C 231 Standard Models Appendix A Classification I O capacity Inputs Outputs Model and Appearance Units with MIL 24 I O points 16 points 24 VDC 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 24EDTM Connectors 8 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 24EDT1M Zo 6b 32 I O points 16 points 24 VDC 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 32EDTM 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 32EDT1M 8 input points 8 points 24 VDC CPM2C 8EDM 16 input points 16 points 24 VDC CPM2C 16EDM 8 output points 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 8ETM 8 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 8ET1M 16 outputs 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 16ETM points 16 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 16ET1M Description C500 CE241 24 pin soldered connector with cover C500 CE242 24 pin crimp connector with cover C500 CE243 24 pin pressure connector Expansion Units Analog I O Unit Model Name Specifications g CPM2C MAD11 Analog I O Unit 2 analog inputs 1 analog output Temperature Sensor Units Model Name Specifications CPM2C TS001 Temperature Sensor 2 thermocouple inputs Unit CPM2C TS101 2 platinum resistance thermometer inputs CompoBus S I O Link Unit Model Name Specificat
243. ord m 1 bits 00 to 11 3 Output 8 outputs Word n 1 bits 00 to 07 24 CPM2C 24EDT Input 16 inputs Word m 1 bits 00 to 15 3 CPM2C 24EDT1 Output 8 outputs Word n 1 bits 00 to 07 32 CPM2C 32EDT Input 16 inputs Word m 1 bits 00 to 15 3 CPM2C 32EDT1 Output 16 outputs Word n 1 bits 00 to 15 Note m m denotes the last input word allocated to the CPU Unit or to the previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I O Unit if one is already connected n n denotes the last output word allocated to the CPU Unit or to the previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I O Unit if one is already connected 87 PC Setup Section 4 6 4 2 3 I O Allocation Examples The following examples shows the I O bits allocated when one 24 point Expan sion I O Unit is connected Bits IR 00100 to IR 00115 are allocated to the Unit s inputs and bits IR 011 00 to IR 01107 are allocated to the Unit s outputs Example 1 Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 IR 000 IR 001 IR 010 IR 011 Inputs Outputs The following examples shows the I O bits allocated when an 8 point Input Unit 24 point Expansion I O Unit and 16 point Output Unit are connected Output bits are not allocated to the Input Unit and input bits are not allocated to the Out Example 2 put Unit CPU Unit 10 I O points Expansion I O Unit
244. ot install the CPM2C S above equipment that generates a large amount of heat such as heaters transformers or large resistors Install a cooling fan or system when the ambient temperature exceeds 55 C Control panel Air vent 53 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 e The CPM2C S CPU Unit itself can be installed in any orientation but when the CPU Unit is combined with a Power Supply Unit Expansion I O Unit or Expan sion Unit the mounting orientation of the PC is restricted in the way described below e When a PC is installed as shown in the following diagram Power Supply Units Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units can be mounted The ambient operating temperature range is 0 to 55 C Bottom e When a PC is installed as shown in the following diagram Power Supply Units Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units cannot be mounted The ambient operating temperature range is 0 to 55 C Bottom Bottom e When a PC is installed in any other way Power Supply Units Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units cannot be mounted and the ambient oper ating temperature range is 0 to 50 C Electrical Noise Power lines and high voltage equipment can cause electrical noise in the PC e Do not install the CPM2C S in a panel or cabinet with high voltage equipment e Allow at least 200 mm between the CPM2C S and nearby power lines 200 mm min 200 mm min Acce
245. overwritten from program 456 words PC Setup34 DM 6600 to DM 6655 Used to store various parameters that con 56 words trol PC operation Note 1 The contents of the HR area AR area Counter area and read write DM area are backed up by the CPU Unit s battery If the battery is removed or fails the contents of these areas will be lost and returned to default values 2 When a TC numbers is used as a word operand the timer or counter PV is accessed when used as a bit operand its Completion Flag is accessed 3 Data in DM 6144 to DM 6655 cannot be overwritten from the program but they can be changed from a Programming Device 4 The program and data in DM 6144 to DM 6655 are stored in flash memory 4 1 1 Functions IR Area The functions of the IR area are explained below IR area bits from IR 00000 to IR 01915 are allocated to terminals on the CPU Unit and Expansion 1 O Units IR words that are not allocated to inputs or outputs can be used as work words Input words begin with IR 000 and output words be gin with IR 010 Note 1 The input bits shown in the following tables can operate as normal inputs or they can be assigned special functions in the PC Setup Special functions for input bits IR 00000 through IR 00002 are set in DM 6642 Bit PC Setup setting DM 6642 bits 08 to15 address 00 02 03 or 04 Used as inputs for synchronized pulse control IR 00000 IR 00001 IR 00002 Used as normal inputs
246. peed counter inputs Used as a normal input 69 Section 3 4 Wiring and Connections Special functions for input bits IR 00003 through IR 00006 are set in DM 6628 Bits in Bit address DM 6628 IR 00003 00 to 03 PC Setup setting in DM 6628 Used as normal Used as interrupt Used as IR 00004 04 to 07 High speed Counter Input Connection Examples Differential Phase Mode Count frequency 5 kHz E6B2 CWZ6C Encoder NPN open col lector output Black ac 00000 A phase input White 00001 B phase input T 00002 Z phase input Leakage Current inputs inputs including counter mode quick response inputs Pulse Plus Direction Input mode Count frequency 20 kHz CPMa S E6A2 CS5C Encoder 00000 Pulse input 00001 Direction input 00002 Reset input Sensor or switch A leakage current can cause false inputs when using 2 wire sensors proximity switches or photoelectric switches or limit switches with LEDs False inputs won t occur if the leakage current is less than 1 0 mA If the leakage current exceeds these values insert a bleeder resistor in the circuit to reduce the input impedance as shown in the following diagram Input power supply 2 wire sensor etc Device s leakage current mA R Bleeder resistance kQ W Bleeder resistor s power rating W Lo CPM2C S input impedance kQ I CPM2C
247. peed Counter Inputs In these examples Encoders with an external 24 VDC open collector output are connected Differential Phase Mode Count frequency 5 kHz CPMEC S Encoder 24 VDC Up Down Mode Count frequency 20 kHz 00000 A phase input 00001 B phase input 00002 Z phase input Pulse Plus Direction Input Mode Count frequency 20 kHz CPMeC S Encoder 00000 Pulse input 00001 Direction input Sensor or switch 00002 Reset input 24 VDC Increment Mode Count frequency 20 kHz CPC CPMeC Encoder 00000 CW input 00000 Pulse input 00001 CCW input 00001 Normal input Sensor or switch 00002 Reset input 00002 Normal input 24 VDC 24 VDC Note CW is clockwise and CCW is counter clockwise Using IR 00003 to IR 00006 as Interrupt Inputs Counter Mode In these examples an Encoder with an external 24 VDC open collector output is connected Increment or decrement Count frequency 2 kHz CPMEC S Encoder Input 00003 to 00006 PC Setup Settings The input bits shown in the following tables can operate as normal inputs or they can be assigned special functions in the PC Setup Special functions for input bits IR 00000 through IR 00002 are set in DM 6642 Bit PC Setup setting DM 6642 bits 08 to15 02 03 or 04 Used as inputs for synchronized pulse control address 00 01 IR 00000 IR 00001 IR 00002 Used as normal inputs Used as high s
248. peration The program or PC Setup can be overwritten during that delay In addition to the online editing delay interrupts may be masked for up to 150 us for system processing This example shows the interrupt response time i e the time from when the interrupt input turns ON until the start of the interrupt processing routine when input interrupts are used under the conditions shown below Minimum Response Time Interrupt ON delay 50 us Interrupt mask standby time 0 us Change to interrupt processing 10 us Minimum response time 60 us Maximum Response Time Except for the Online Editing of DM 6144 to DM 6655 Interrupt ON delay 50 us Interrupt mask standby time 150 us Change to interrupt processing 10 us Maximum response time 210 us 151 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 In addition to the response time shown above the time required for executing the interrupt processing routine itself and a return time of 10 us must also be ac counted for when returning to the process that was interrupted 7 4 One to one PC Link I O Response Time When two CPM2C S PCs are linked 1 1 the I O response time is the time re quired for an input executed at one of the PCs to be output to the other PC by means of 1 1 PC Link communications The minimum and maximum I O response times are shown here using as an example the following instructions executed at the master and the slave In this example communicati
249. plication Precautions sopo sitrons ha i beoi ee ene cette eens OEC Directives aeea Gare ne FS ob betwee Bak pe NE E AE oeone eo eb ban tate ade Mate te FRE en Claes xi Application Precautions 1 2 3 xii Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowl edge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amusement ma chines safety equipment and other systems machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Un
250. port servicing setting enable 00 Hex 5 of the cycle time 01 Hex Use time in bits 00 to 07 DM 6618 00 to 07 Cycle monitor time Effective when bits 08 to 15 are set to 01 02 or 03 00 to 99 BCD Setting See bits 08 to 15 below A fatal error will be generated and PC operation will stop if the cycle time exceeds the cycle monitor time set here 08 to 15 Cycle monitor enable Setting in 00 to 07 x units 99 s max 00 Hex 120 ms setting in bits 00 to 07 disabled 01 Hex Setting units 10 ms 02 Hex Setting units 100 ms 03 Hex Setting units 1 s DM 6619 00 to 15 Minimum cycle time 0000 Variable no minimum 0001 to 9999 BCD Minimum time in ms 98 Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 Word s Bit s Function Interrupt Processing DM 6620 to DM 6639 The following settings are read by the CPU when program execution is started DM 6620 00 to 03 Input time constant for IR 00000 to IR 00002 0 Hex 10 ms 1 Hex 1 ms 2 Hex 2 ms 3 Hex 3 ms 4 Hex 5 ms 5 Hex 10 ms 6 Hex 20 ms 7 Hex 40 ms 8 Hex 80 ms 04 to 07 Input time constant for IR 00003 and IR 00004 Setting same as bits 00 to 03 08 to 11 Input time constant for IR 00005 Setting same as bits 00 to 03 12 to 15 Not used DM 6621 00 to 07 Input time constant for IR 001 00 Hex 10 ms 01 Hex 1 ms 02 Hex 2ms 03 Hex 3ms 04 Hex 5 ms 05 Hex 10 ms 06 Hex 20 ms 0
251. program Some parameters are accessed only when PC s power supply is turned ON and others are accessed regularly while the power is ON It will be necessary to turn the power OFF and then ON again to enable a new setting if the parameter is accessed only when the power is turned ON Refer to 4 6 PC Setup for details on the PC Setup The Communications Switches determine whether the peripheral port and RS 232C port connected through the communications port operate with the standard communications settings or the communications settings in the PC Setup CPM2C S Structure and Operation Section 1 3 1 3 2 Operating Modes PROGRAM Mode MONITOR Mode RUN Mode N Caution CPM2C S CPU Units have 3 operating modes PROGRAM MONITOR and RUN The program cannot be executed in PROGRAM mode This mode is used to perform the following operations in preparation for program execution e Changing initial operating parameters such as those in the PC Setup e Writing transferring or checking the program e Checking wiring by force setting and force resetting I O bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points may operate unexpectedly if the corre sponding output bit is turned ON by transferring I O memory or force setting out put bits from a Programming Device When output bits are allocated to the DeviceNet I O Link Write Area data written to the output bits through
252. pulse outputs and a clock function e The standard CompoBus S interface increases the PC s I O capacity reduces wiring and saves space Be Ue en fs CompoBus S Slaves e The CPM2C S is a compact Unit so it can be incorporated into almost any ma chine Furthermore the CPM2C S CPU Unit can be mounted in any direction e The CPM2C S100C DRT and CPM2C S110C DRT are also equipped with DeviceNet Slave functions to provide distributed control through a DeviceNet connection with a host PC e The CPM2C S itself can handle a wide range of machine control applications In addition the CPM2C S is capable of communications with devices such as personal computers and OMRON Programmable Terminals so it is ideal to use to expand or upgrade existing systems CPM2C S100C CPM2C S100C DRT CPM2C S110C CPM2C S110C DRT Communications port CompoBus S interface I O connector DeviceNet interface e The CPM2C S CPU Unit has a total of 10 I O points 6 inputs and 4 transistor outputs Up to 3 CPM2C series Expansion I O Units can be connected for a maximum I O capacity of 106 I O points with three 32 point Expansion 1 O Units It is possible to connect up to 362 I O points by adding Slaves through the CompoBus S system e The communications port can be used simultaneously as two ports Peripheral and RS 232C The peripheral port supports Programming Devices Host Link and no protocol communications The RS 232C port supports Host L
253. put time constant for all inputs can be set to 1 ms 2 ms 3 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 40 ms or 80 ms The effects of chattering and external noise can be reduced by increasing the input time constant Analog I O Supported by Expansion Units and CompoBus S Master Functions Analog I O Units Analog I O Terminals Temperature Sensor Units Other Functions Interval Timer Interrupts Calendar Clock Long term Timer Up to 3 optional Analog I O Units can be connected to the CPM2C S For each Analog I O Unit mounted to the Unit 2 analog input points and 1 analog output point are available By mounting 3 Analog I O Units a maximum of 6 analog input points and 3 analog output points can be made available By using a com bination of the PID instruction and PWM instruction time proportional control is possible e The ranges supported for analog input signals are 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA and the resolution is 1 6000 full scale The averaging function and power interruption detection function can be used e The ranges supported for analog output signals are 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA and the resolution is 1 6000 full scale Up to 8 analog inputs and 8 analog outputs can be connected through a Compo Bus S Analog I O Terminal Up to 3 optional Temperature Sensor Units can be mounted to the CPM2C S There are 2 models of Temperature Sensor Unit
254. r PC designed for control operations in systems requiring from 10 to 106 I O points per PC There are two manuals describing the setup and operation of the CPM2C S The CPM2C S Operation Manual this manual and the CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 Programming Manual W353 The CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 Programming Manual is referred to as simply the Programming Manual in this manual This manual describes the system configuration and installation of the CPM2C S and provides a basic explanation of operating procedures for the Programming Consoles It also introduces the capabilities of the SYSMAC Support Software SSS and SYSMAC CPT Support Software Read this manual first to acquaint yourself with the CPM2C S Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual W356 for descriptions of the specifica tions and installation of Expansion I O Units and refer to the CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM 1 V2 Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W353 for descriptions of the specifications and instal lation of Expansion Units The SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manuals Basics and C series PCs W247 and W248 provide descriptions of SSS operations for the CPM2C S and other SYSMAC C series PCs The SYSMAC CPT Support Software Quick Start Guide W332 and User Manual W333 provide descriptions of ladder dia gram operations in the Windows environment The CX Programmer User Manual W361 and the CX Server User Manual W362 provide d
255. r CPM2C S RS 232C port to RS 422A conversion Requires a 5 VDC 150 mA power supply which is supplied through the CPM2C S connection Can also be connected to a personal computer but this connection requires an external 5 VDC power supply Link Adapter B500 AL004 Use for personal computer RS 232C port to RS 422A conversion Can also be connected to a CPM2C S RS 422 RS 232C Adapter Unit 234 CPM2C CIF11 Use for CPM2C S peripheral port to RS 422 conversion Appendix B Dimensions All dimensions are in millimeters CPU Units All CPM2C S CPU Units weigh 160 g max CPM2C S100C CPM2C S100C DRT CPM2C S110C CPM2C S110C DRT a y i Ait z 5 0 Se T CPU Units with Connectors Attached CPU Unit with Crimp Connectors ul E CPU Unit with Soldered Connectors _ va Expansion I O Units Note Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual W356 for the specifications and dimen sions of Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units 235 Numbers 1 1 connections 1 1 PC Link communications I O response timing 1 N connections A AC Power Supply Unit See Power Supply Unit Adapter Units available models components Adapters available models Analog I O Unit See also Expansion Units available models Analog Terminals ASCII converting displays Programming Console atmosphere B basic functions battery replacing binary data
256. r PV is within comparison range 6 06 ON Counter PV is within comparison range 7 07 ON Counter PV is within comparison range 8 4 6 High speed Counter Comparison Operation ON Operating OFF Stopped High speed Counter PV Overflow Underflow Flag ON An overflow or underflow occurred OFF Normal operation Not used Pulse Output 0 Output Status ON Pulse output 0 is accelerating or decelerating OFF Pulse output 0 is operating at a constant rate Pulse Output 0 Overflow Underflow Flag ON An overflow or underflow occurred OFF Normal operation Pulse Output 0 Pulse Quantity Set Flag ON Pulse quantity has been set OFF Pulse quantity has not been set Pulse Output 0 Pulse Output Completed Flag ON Completed OFF Not completed Pulse Output 0 Output Status ON Pulses being output OFF Stopped 94 Not used Pulse Output 1 Overflow Underflow Flag ON An overflow or underflow occurred OFF Normal operation Pulse Output 1 Pulse Quantity Set Flag ON Pulse quantity has been set OFF Pulse quantity has not been set Pulse Output 1 Pulse Output Completed Flag Completed Not completed Pulse Output 1 Output Status ON Pulses being output OFF Stopped Basic PC Operation and I O Processes Section 4 7 Word s Function AR 13 00 Power up PC Setup Error Flag Turns ON when there is
257. rand bit 5 The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program Memory is reached In this case an END instruction was reached Indicates the address of END instruction Indicates the amount used by the user program in units of 0 1 Kwords 180 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 8 4 10 Inserting and Deleting Instructions This operation is used to insert or delete instructions from the program It is pos sible in PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM To demonstrate this operation an IR 00105 NO condition will be inserted at program address 00206 and an IR 00103 NO condition deleted from address 00205 as shown in the following diagram Original Program 4 _ 01000 00201 00102 Delete 00105 Delete 00205 00103 A or nseri dF 00206 AND NOT 00104 ingen 00207 01000 Endon ooze ENDO Insertion Follow the procedure below to insert the IR 00105 NO condition at address 00206 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the address where the NO condition will be inserted and press the Down Arrow Key It is not necessary to input leading zeroes aaco 3 Input the new instruction and press the INS Key SC Itt es 4 Press the Down Arrow Key to insert the new instruction Note For instructions that require more operands such as set values input the operands
258. rch Finds occurrences of the specified operand bit in the program 180 Inserting and deleting Inserts or deletes instructions from the program 181 instructions Entering or editing programs Overwrites the contents of the current Program Memory to either input a 176 program for the first time or to change a program that already exists Checking the program Checks for programming errors and displays the program address and 182 error when errors are found Bit digit word monitor Monitors the status of up to 16 bits and words although only 3 can be 182 shown on the display at one time Multiple address monitor Monitors the status of up to 6 bits and words simultaneously 184 Differentiation monitor Monitors the up or down differentiation status of a particular bit 184 Binary monitor Monitors the ON OFF status of any word s 16 bits 185 3 word monitor Monitors the status of three consecutive words 186 Signed decimal monitor Converts the contents of the specified word from signed hexadecimal 186 two s complement format to signed decimal for display Unsigned decimal monitor Converts hexadecimal data in a word to unsigned decimal for display 187 3 word data modification Changes the contents of one or more of the 3 consecutive words 187 displayed in the 3 Word Monitor operation Changing timer counter SV 1 Changes the SV of a timer or counter 188 Changing timer counter SV 2 Makes fine adjustment changes to the SV of the timer or counter
259. recautions flicker output example force set reset clearing Programming Console Programming Console function codes reading and changing expansion instruction as signments functions comparison H I hexadecimal data converting displays Programming Console hold bit status PC Setup settings humidity T O capacity T O connectors available models pin allocation CPU Units wiring 1 0 errors troubleshooting I O line noise preventing T O Modules T O refreshing immediate refreshing T O response time See also timing 1 1 PC Link communications T O Terminals immediate refreshing indicators flashing ERR ALM indicator lit ERR ALM indicator PC status indicators inductive loads initialization time required input devices connections Index input specifications CPU Units Expansion I O Units input time constants PC Setup settings inputs wiring configuration inrush current suppressing inspections installation site selecting instructions execution times inserting and deleting Programming Console searching Programming Console insulation resistance interlocks interrupt processing calculating response time masking timing interrupt program execution in cyclic operation L M leakage current LED indicators limit switches preventing false inputs machine control functions list maintenance accessories functions
260. ring and editing Programming Console execution in cyclic operation program capacity uploading proximity switches preventing false inputs PT connections pulse control pulse outputs wiring Q R quick response inputs relay outputs connections Relay Terminals remote I O communications through CompoBus S through DeviceNet RS 232C port servicing time RS 232C port servicing time PC Setup settings RS 232C Port Error RUN mode description S search instruction Programming Console operands Programming Console self diagnosis functions self holding bit example self diagnostic functions Sensor Amplifier Terminals Sensor Terminals serial communications settings basic operations hold bit status startup mode T O operations port servicing scan time shock resistance signed decimal data modifying Programming Console monitoring Slaves CompoBus S compatible Index specifications characteristics Expansion Memory Unit general specifications T O connectors input specifications CPU Units Expansion I O Units output specifications Expansion I O Units transistor output Power Supply Unit SR area SSS startup mode PC Setup settings status monitoring Programming Console Support Software SV modifying Programming Console syntax checking the program Programming Console SYSMAC Support Software See SSS SYSMAC CPT Support Software preca
261. roperly mounted e Are the EEPROM specifications cor rect e Are the peripheral port communica tions settings correct See the note above See the note above 227 Handling Section 10 3 10 3 4 Downloading Programs 228 Ladder programs and the contents of data memory can be downloaded from the EEPROM to the PC using the procedure given below When downloading note the following points N Caution If the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode when downloading is started it will auto matically switch to PROGRAM mode and operation will stop Confirm that no adverse effects will occur to the system before downloading Not doing so may result in unexpected operation Note 1 If the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode switch the PC mode to PROGRAM mode 2 Confirm that the program or other data to be downloaded to the PC is com patible with the PC before downloading 3 For the CQM1 or CQM1H when downloading programs that use user as signed function codes for expansion instructions be sure that pin 4 on the CPU Unit s DIP switch is ON If these programs are downloaded while the pin is OFF the assignments for the expansion instructions will return to their default settings 4 After downloading has been completed be sure to confirm the user pro gram data and expansion instructions 5 When the DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button is pressed all EEPROM data lad der programs data memory etc is written to the PC CPM2C CIF01 CPM2C S p
262. ror can be identified by the error message displayed on a Programming Device error flags in the AR and SR areas and the error code output to SR 253 Fatal and Non fatal PC errors are divided into 2 categories based on the severity of the errors The Errors status of the ERR ALM indicator lit or flashing shows which type of error has occurred ERR ALM Lit Fatal Error Fatal errors are serious errors which stop CPM2C S operation There are two ways to restart operation e Turn the PC OFF and then ON again e Use a Programming Device to switch the PC to PROGRAM mode and read clear the error ERR ALM Flashing Non fatal Error Non fatal errors are less serious errors which don t stop CPM2C S operation Communications Errors The LED indicators and AR area flags indicate when a CompoBus S commu nications error RS 232C port error or peripheral port error has occurred CompoBus S Communications Error When an error occurs in CompoBus S communications the SD and RD indica tors will be OFF and the ERC indicator will be ON Check the Slaves and the transmission lines and restart communications RS 232C Port Error When an error occurs in communications through the RS 232C port the COMM indicator will be OFF and the RS 232C Communications Error Flag AR 0804 will be ON Check the cables and restart communications Peripheral Port Error When an error occurs in communications through the peripheral port the COMM indicator will be O
263. rrect input The buzzer will sound if a value outside the specified range is input allowing no writing 8 4 23 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to change the decimal value of a word being moni tored as unsigned decimal data within a range of 0 to 65 535 A change into hexadecimal data is made automatically Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion I O Units may operate unex pectedly 1 Monitor unsigned decimal the status of the word for which the present val ue is to be changed Unsigned decimal monitor 2 Press the CHG Key to begin decimal data modification 191 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 3 Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV The operation will end and the decimal without sign monitoring display will return when the WRITE Key is pressed The PV can be set within a range of 0 to 65 535 C IIL Sees 3 2 7 WRITE If an erroneous input has been made press the CLR Key to restore the sta tus prior
264. rrupted possibly causing data from immediately before power interruption to be read by the master If this creates a potential problem use the following measures to eliminate the problem e When starting in RUN or MONITOR mode configure the ladder program so that the Read area is rewritten with appropriate data e When starting in PROGRAM mode it will not be possible to take direct mea sures at the slave Monitor the status at the master and do not read the data when the operating mode is PROGRAM mode When a fatal error occurs at a slave the master may read data from immediately before the error In this case also monitor the status at the master and do not read the data SECTION 7 Cycle Time and I O Response Time This section explains the cycle time and I O response time in CPM2C S PCs Refer to this section when writing the user pro gram to improve operation and reduce response delays Pel Cy Cle Timi osrin ot Bose ess Bae eee Seay BE NE Pee eek gag bl ie alee en sree AA 7 1 1 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts 0 00 00 eee ee eee eee 7 1 2 Cycle Time and Operations 0 00 eee eee a 133 Cycle Time Example s sexe css ein bh oe Peta A ee aed Meme Nae es 7 1 4 Instruction Execution Times 0 0 0 0 cece ee eee ee 7 2 VO Response Time 04 3 5 0 5 ivi osa e ane a eee e GH RR ote Qe aR eee earn dine tates 7 2 1 CPM2C S I O Response Time 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 7 2 2 T O Response Time betw
265. ry backs up memory in the CPU Unit The battery is connected when the Unit is shipped Low Battery Detection Switch This switch enables or disables the detection of a low battery error When a battery is not connected disable low battery detection by sliding the switch back toward the battery Switch position Low battery detection Forward away from battery Error detection enabled Back toward battery Error detection disabled Expansion I O Connector Connects the PC s CPU Unit to an Expansion I O Unit or Expansion Unit Up to 3 Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units can be connected to a CPU Unit A cover for the expansion I O connector is included with the CPU Unit Unit Components Section 2 2 1 0 Connector Pin Allocation CPM2C S I O pin allocation CPM2C S with sinking outputs CPM2C S with sourcing outputs IN 4 IN 5 CompoBus S Terminal Block Configuration BOH BOL DeviceNet Communications Connector Configuration fe m l Bc v il CAN L er Shield a7 CAN H V XW4B 05C1 H1 D DeviceNet Communications Connector included with the CPM2C S 45 Unit Components Section 2 2 2 2 2 Expansion I O Units Note Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual W356 for de scriptions of the main components of the Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units 2 2 3 AC Power Supply Unit Front View Bottom Side ai ill 1 Terminal
266. s Weidmuller Signal wire 046290 Sleeve b We recommend the following crimper Weidmuller PZ1 5 Crimper part number 900599 c The Weidmuller 901851 Sleeve cannot be used 3 Insert the pin terminals into the CompoBus S terminal block on the front of the CPM2C S and tighten the locking screw BDH 73 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Maximum Transmission The maximum lengths of the trunk line branch lines and total transmission line Line Length length depend on the communications mode and the kind of transmission line flat cable or VCTF cable being used The maximum lengths are further re stricted if flat cable is being used with more than 16 Slaves Trunk line length Branch line length Total branch line length Ly Lo L3 L4 L5 Item Max length in high speed mode Max length in long distance mode VCTF cable Flat cable or 4 core VCTF cable VCTF cable Flat cable or 4 core Up to 16 Slaves 17 to 32 Slaves VCTF cable Trunk line length 100 m max 100 m max 30 m max 500 m max Free branching Branch line length 3 m max 3 m max 3 m max 6 m max Total wire length Total branch line 50 m max 50 m max 30 m max 120 m max 200 m max length 3 4 8 Wiring DeviceNet Communications Cables Wire the DeviceNet communications cables as shown in the following diagram XW4B 05C1 H1 D Connector included with the CPM2C S XW4B 05C4 TF D Multi drop Connector V
267. s 5 N WARNING Z N WARNING N Caution N Caution N Caution e The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm FALS instruction is executed As a coun termeasure for such errors external safety measures must be provided to en sure safety in the system e The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the output relays or destruction of the output transistors As a countermeasure for such problems external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system elf the 24 VDC output service power supply of the Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 is overloaded or shorted the voltage may drop causing out puts to turn OFF External safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system in such an event When handling the Memory Backup Battery never drop disassemble distort short circuit recharge heat to a temperature exceeding 100 C or throw into fire Otherwise the Battery may explode catch fire or leak fluid When transferring programs to other nodes or when making changes to I O memory confirm the safety of the destination node before transfer Not doing so may result in injury Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time Otherwise the input signals may not be readable Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the Power Supply Unit
268. s how a CQM1H PROO1 E CQM1 PROO1 E or C200H PRO27 E Programming Console can be connected to the communica tions port on the CPM2C S CPU Unit A CQM1H PROO01 E Programming Console can be connected directly Peripheral port a a CPM2C S CPU Unit E CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable a CS1W CN114 Connecting Cable FF g T r C200H CN222 or C200H CN422 Connecting Cable CS1W CN224 or CS1W CN624 Peripheral port CQM1 PRO27 E Connecting Cable A C200H PRO27 E Programming Con sole can be connected directly to the CPU Unit using a CS1W CN224 or CS1W CN624 Connecting Cable CPM2C CIFO01 Note 1 Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral port A Programming Console cannot be connected through the RS 232C port on a CPM2C CN111 Adapter 2 If the Programming Console s cable is disconnected and then reconnected within 2 seconds it won t be necessary to reenter the password and the pre vious display status will remain In some cases it won t be necessary to re enter the password if the Programming Console s cable is disconnected while a time consuming operation Such as a program check is being per formed 166 Using a Programming Console Section 8 3 Panel Installation The C200H PRO27 E Programming Console can be installed in a control panel as shown in the following diagram The C200H ATT01 Mounting Bracket is sold separately Mounting hole dimensions Mounting
269. s section provides information on installing and wiring a CPM2C S PC Be sure to follow the directions and precautions in this section when installing the CPM2C S in a panel or cabinet wiring the power supply or wiring I O Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual W356 for information on wiring Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units 3 1 Design Precautions roris web eds eb hae ed LA eae eed doe ct eich beh genet Geb 3 1 1 Power Supply Wiring sisese sek ienn A te Se ees ae es oe 3 1 2 Power Supply Voltage 0 0 ee eee ee eee 3 1 3 Interlock and Limit Circuits 0 0 00 eee eee 3 2 Selecting an Installation Site 0 ee cee ee eee eee eens 3 2 1 Installation Site Conditions 0 0 cee ee eee 3 2 2 Panel Cabinet Installation 0 0 eee ee 323 Anstalling the CPM2C 8 e ciea s 4osips cig elt ae St SEL SOS Beek eh eee b a Enei E 3 3 1 Connecting Units 2 200 ce te oe ek Gee ee ee ee ea ee 3 3 2 CPM2C S Installation i sesse ess estes eos a oa Stele gs Saale aos 3 4 Wiring and Connections cesce eccessi 0c cence nee e eens 3 4 1 General Precautions for Wiring 2 0 0 eee eee eee 3 4 2 Power Supply Wiring 0 0 eects 3 4 3 Using the AC Power Supply Unit 0 00 2 3 4 4 Removing and Wiring I O Connectors 0 00 c eee eee eee 3 4 5 Using Terminal Blocks 0 0 eee cee eee 3 4 6 Connecting I O Devices 0 cece eee 3 4 7 Wiri
270. s will be displayed however if any have been defined for the specified function code When the program is transferred from the SSS to the PC TKY MCMP DSW and 7SEG will be displayed on the SSS but will not be executed in the CPU Unit They will be treated as NOP If expansion instructions are transferred to the PC with DM 6602 is set to the de fault settings a message will be displayed saying that expansion instructions cannot be written because DIP switch pin 4 is OFF Change the setting of DM 6602 to enable user settings to use expansion instructions If instructions not supported by the CPM2C S are transferred to the PC a message saying to set expansion instructions will be displayed and transfer will not be possible 164 SYSMAC Support Software SSS Section 8 2 Expansion Instructions PC Setup 1 2 3 It will not be possible to transfer the program if the function codes assigned to expansion instructions have been changed from their default settings A mes sage to turn ON the DIP switch of the PC and execute again will be displayed Change the function code assignments to the CQM1 defaults shown in the fol lowing table before programming Function code Default CPM2C S Default CQM1 Assignments Assignments 17 ASFT ASFT 18 TKY 19 _ MCMP 47 RXD RXD 48 TXD TXD 60 CMPL CMPL 61 INI INI 62 PRV PRV 63 CTBL CTBL 64 SPED SPED 65 PULS PULS
271. sing DM 17 ASFT 13 0 Shifting 1 word 2 6 22 9 Shifting 10 words 1 51 ms Shifting 2 048 words via DM 20 CMP 7 0 When comparing a constant to a constant 2 6 8 3 When comparing two words 12 1 When comparing two DM 21 MOV 7 8 When transferring a constant to a word 2 6 8 4 When transferring from one word to another 22 8 When transferring DMto DM 22 MVN 7 9 When transferring a constant to a word 2 6 8 4 When transferring from one word to another 22 8 When transferring DMto DM 23 BIN 15 8 When converting a word to a word 2 6 30 3 When converting DMto DM 24 BCD 14 6 When converting a word to a word 2 6 29 0 When converting DMto DM 25 ASL 8 6 When shifting a word 2 5 15 8 When shifting DM 26 ASR 8 4 When shifting a word 2 5 15 6 When shifting DM 27 ROL 7 3 When rotating a word 2 5 14 5 When rotating DM 28 ROR 7 3 When rotating a word 2 5 14 5 When rotating DM 29 COM 8 9 When inverting a word 2 5 16 1 When inverting DM 140 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 Code Mnemonic ON execution Conditions Top min bottom max OFF execution time us time us 30 ADD 14 7 Constant constant gt word 2 6 16 0 Word word word 37 6 DM DM DM 31 SUB 14 6 Constant constant gt word 2 6 15 8 Word word word 37 5 DM DM gt DM 32 MUL 26 8 Constan
272. specifies 0 1 ms units 01 specifies 0 1 ms units 02 specifies 1 ms units and 03 specifies 10 ms units 4 6 PC Setup 4 6 1 Overview The PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 contains various settings that control PC operation Changes to the PC Setup are saved when the CPM2C S is turned OFF program execution is started or program execution is stopped Always perform one of the following operations after changing the PC Setup e Switch the CPM2C S to MONITOR mode or RUN mode e Turn the CPM2C S OFF and then ON again Changing PC Setup Settings The PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 can be edited from a Programming De vice The settings in DM 6600 to DM 6644 can be changed only when the PC is in PROGRAM mode The settings in DM 6645 to DM 6655 can be changed when the PC is in PROGRAM mode or MONITOR mode although the PC s cycle time will be quite long when the settings are changed in MONITOR mode CPU Unit Access of PC The CPM2C S CPU Unit reads parts of the PC Setup at different points of PC Setup Settings PC Setup Errors 96 operation The CPU Unit timing is as follows DM 6600 to DM 6614 Read once when the PC is turned ON DM 6615 to DM 6644 Read once at the start of program execution DM 6645 to DM 6655 Read regularly while the PC is ON If there is an error in the PC Setup settings a non fatal error error code 9B will be generated when the CPU Unit accesses that part of the PC Setup The PC Setup Error Flags AR 1300 to A
273. ssibility Ensure that the CPM2C S can be accessed for normal operation and mainte nance e Provide a clear path to the CPM2C S for operation and maintenance High voltage equipment or power lines could be dangerous if they are in the way during routine operations 54 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 e Separate the CPM2C S by at least 100 mm from other devices Other device M Other device 100 mm min 100 mm min 3 3 Installing the CPM2C S This section describes how to install the CPM2C S and connect Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units Refer to Appendix B for diagrams showing the dimensions of the CPM2C S CPU Units Note Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual for dimen sions of the Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units 3 3 1 Connecting Units Up to 3 Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units can be connected to a CPM2C S CPU Unit Use the following procedure when connecting an Expan sion I O Unit or Expansion Unit 1 2 3 1 Remove the cover from the CPU Unit s or the last Expansion I O Unit s or Expansion Unit s expansion I O connector If the cover is difficult to remove use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the cover from the expansion I O connec tor 7 T Dig Expansion I O i ad j Le ae connector cover a 55 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 2 Align the Unit and CPU Unit or previous Expansion I O Unit or Expansion Unit so that the
274. stall the CPM2C S correctly as outlined in this manual Failure to do so may result in Unit malfunction 3 2 1 Installation Site Conditions Note Do not install the CPM2C S under any of the following conditions e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to a temperature below 0 C or over 55 C e Locations subject to a humidity below 10 or over 90 e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tempera ture e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to shock or vibration e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals Be sure that the conditions at the installation site conform to the CPM2C S gen eral specifications Refer to 2 1 1 General Specifications for details Note Provide proper shielding when installing in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation e Locations near to power supply lines 3 2 2 Panel Cabinet Installation Consider PC operation maintenance and surrounding conditions when instal ling the CPM2C S in a panel or cabinet Overheating The operating temperature range for the CPM2C S is 0 to 55 C Be sure that there is adequate ventilation for cooling e Allow enough space for air circulation e Do n
275. stop and all outputs will be turned OFF if the power supply voltage falls below 85 of the rated value Momentary Power Interruption A power interruption will not be detected and CPU Unit operation will continue if the power interruption lasts less than 2 ms A power interruption may or may not be detected for power interruptions some what longer than 2 ms When a power interruption is detected the CPU Unit will stop operating and all outputs will be turned OFF Automatic Reset Operation will restart automatically when the power supply voltage is restored to more than 85 of the rated voltage Timing Chart of Power OFF Operation The power interruption detection time is the time required for a power interrup tion to be detected after the power supply voltage drops below 85 of the rated value 1 Minimum power interruption detection time Power interruptions that are shorter than 2 ms will not be detected CPM2C S Structure and Operation Section 1 3 2 Undetermined additional time Power interruptions only slightly longer than the minimum power interrup tion time may not be detected 85 of rated voltage I Detection of power interruption ee b 1 Minimum time 2 Additional l time R SS E Program execution l Executing 1 Stopped l i i 1 I I I CPU reset signal sl I I l CPU Unit operation will CPU Unit operation may continue if voltage is continue if voltage is restor
276. switch and set DM 6650 to 0001 host link port settings specified in DM 6651 The computer cannot be connected to the pe ripheral bus if bits 00 to 03 of DM 6650 are set to 0 standard port settings DM 6650 00 to 03 Port settings 00 Hex Standard 1 start bit 7 data bits even parity 2 stop bits 9 600 bps Host Link unit number 0 01 Hex Settings in DM 6651 Any other setting specifies standard settings causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302 04 to 11 Not used 12 to 15 Communications mode 0 Hex Host Link or peripheral bus 1 Hex No protocol Any other setting specifies Host Link causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302 DM 6651 00 to 07 Baud rate 00 Hex 1 200 bps 01 Hex 2 400 bps 02 Hex 4 800 bps 03 Hex 9 600 bps 04 Hex 19 200 bps 08 to 15 Frame format Start bits Data bits Stop bits Parity 00 Hex 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Even 01 Hex 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit Odd 02 Hex 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit None 03 Hex 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Even 04 Hex 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits Odd 05 Hex 1 bit 7 bits 2 bits None 06 Hex 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Even 07 Hex 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit Odd 08 Hex 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit None 09 Hex 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Even 10 Hex 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits Odd 11 Hex 1 bit 8 bits 2 bits None Any other setting specifies standard settings 1 start bit 7 data bits even parity 2 stop bits 9 600 bps causes a non fatal error and turns ON AR 1302
277. t 15 CPM2C S Structure and Operation Section 1 3 1 3 CPM2C S Structure and Operation 1 3 1 CPM2C S Structure DeviceNet Master DeviceNet interface External input devices Input circuits port I O Memory Program PC Setup Note Note Communications Switches 16 I O memory Commu nications f The following diagram shows the internal structure of the CPU Unit CompoBus S Slaves CompoBus S interface tt External output devices PC Setup Output circuits Program Settings Communications switches The program reads and writes data in this memory area during execution Part of the I O memory contains the bits that reflect the status of the PC s inputs and outputs Parts of the I O memory are cleared when the power is turned ON and other parts are retained Refer to Section 4 Memory Areas for more details on I O memory This is the program written by the user The CPM2C S executes the program cyclically Refer to 1 3 5 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts for details The program can be divided broadly into two parts the main program that is executed cyclically and the interrupt programs that are executed only when the corresponding interrupt is generated The PC Setup contains various startup and operating parameters The PC Set up parameters can be changed from a Programming Device only they cannot be changed from the
278. t x constant gt word 2 6 28 3 Word x word gt word 51 0 DMx DM gt DM 33 DIV 25 9 Constant constant gt word 2 6 27 5 word word word 50 1 DM DM gt DM 34 ANDW 12 3 Constant N constant gt word 2 6 13 8 Word N word word 35 4 DMn DM DM 35 ORW 12 3 Constant V constant gt word 2 6 13 8 Word V word word 35 4 DMV DM DM 36 XORW 12 3 Constant V constant gt word 2 6 13 8 Word word word 35 4 DM DM gt DM 37 XNRW 12 3 Constant V constant gt word 2 6 13 8 Word word word 35 5 DMV DM gt DM 38 INC 8 8 When incrementing a word 2 5 15 9 When incrementing DM 39 DEC 8 9 When decrementing a word 2 5 16 1 When decrementing DM 40 STC 3 0 Any 2 5 41 CLC 3 0 2 5 46 MSG 9 9 With message in words 2 5 17 8 With message in DM 47 RXD 71 9 Word specification 1 byte input 2 6 314 5 DM specification 256 bytes input 48 TXD 32 4 Word specification 1 byte input RS 232C 2 6 264 5 DM specification 256 bytes input RS 232C 27 7 Word specification 1 byte input Host Link 42 2 DM specification 256 bytes input Host Link 50 ADB 14 1 Constant constant gt word 2 6 15 6 Word word word 37 4 DM DM DM 51 SBB 14 4 Constant constant gt word 2 6 15 9 Word word word 37 7 DM DM DM 52 MLB 16 8 Constant x constant gt word 2 6 18 5 Word x word word 41 2 DM x DM gt DM 141 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Sec
279. te PRV 62 Check AR 1100 to AR 1107 or execute PRV 62 Reading status Check when registering interrupt table Check AR 1108 comparison in progress check AR 1109 high speed counter PV overflow underflow or execute PRV 62 Check AR 1108 comparison in progress check AR 1109 high speed counter PV overflow underflow or execute PRV 62 Pulse synchronization Supported Supported Pulse output control deceleration Trapezoidal acceleration Supported with ACC The initial frequency can be set initial frequency can be set PWM output Supported with ACC The being output Supported Supported Number of simultaneous 2 max 2 max pulse outputs Maximum frequency 10 kHz max 10 kHz max Minimum frequency 10 Hz 10 Hz Pulse output quantity 16 777 215 to 16 777 215 16 777 215 to 16 777 215 Direction control Supported Supported Positioning to absolute Supported Supported positions Bit status while pulses are No effect No effect Reading PV Read SR 228 through SR 231 or execute PRV 62 Read SR 228 through SR 231 or execute PRV 62 Resetting PV Supported Supported Status outputs Accelerating decelerating PV overflow underflow Pulse quantity set Pulse output completed Pulse output status Accelerating decelerating PV overflow underflow Pulse quantity set Pulse output completed Pulse output
280. the IOM Hold Bit SR 25212 and set the PC Page turned ON Setup DM 6601 so that the status of the IOM Hold Bit 90 is maintained at startup 97 Eliminate effects from chattering and external noise Set a longer input time constant in the PC Setup Page 99 Comparison with the CPM2C Section 1 5 Maintenance Functions Usage Function Refer to Record data with time stamp Clock calendar function Page 95 Establish user defined errors for desired input FAL 06 defines non fatal errors PC operation W353 conditions Fatal and non fatal errors can be defined continues FALS 07 defines fatal errors PC operation stops Read the number of power interruptions The number of power interruptions is stored in AR 23 Set the startup operating mode Set the startup operating mode in the PC Setup Page DM 6600 97 Communications Functions Usage Function Refer to Read write I O memory data and change the operating Host Link communications Set the communications W353 mode from a host computer mode to Host Link in the PC Setup Connect to a serial device such as a bar code reader No protocol communications Set the communications or serial printer mode to no protocol in the PC Setup Make a high speed connection with an OMRON 1 1 NT Link Set the communications mode to 1 1 NT Programmable Terminal Link in the PC Setup Make a PC PC data link connection with another 1 1 PC Link Set the comm
281. the procedure below to retain the timer counter area and Program Memory addresses 000 through 122 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the SET NOT and then the RESET Key to begin the operation 3 Press the CNT Key to remove the timer counter area from the data areas shown on the display Counter PVs will not be cleared CNT 4 Press 123 to specify 123 as the starting program address B c D 5 173 Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 5 Press the MONTR Key to clear the specified regions of memory MONTR 8 4 3 Reading Clearing Error Messages Key Sequence 1 2 3 This operation is used to display and clear error messages It is possible to dis play and clear non fatal errors and MESSAGE instruction messages in any mode but fatal errors can be cleared in PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before inputting a new program any error messages recorded in memory should be cleared It is assumed here that the causes of any of the errors for which error messages appear have already been taken care of If the buzzer sounds when an attempt is made to clear an error message eliminate the cause of the error and then clear the error message Refer to Section 9 Test Runs and Error Processing for troubleshooting information Follow the procedure below to display and clear messages 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display
282. the program Refer to the Programming Manual W353 for details on cycle time and I O response times Wait for minimum cycle time if a minimum cycle time has been set in the PC Setup DM 6619 Calculate cycle time Write output data to CompoBus S remote I O Slaves Read input data from input bits Write output data to output bits Exchange I O data with the DeviceNet Master DRT versions only Perform explicit message communications with the DeviceNet Master DRT versions only Perform RS 232C port communications processing Can be changed in DM 6616 Perform peripheral port communications processing Can be changed in DM 6617 The cycle time can be read from a Programming Device AR 14 contains the maximum cycle time and AR 15 contains the present cycle time in multiples of 0 1 ms 20 CPM2C S Structure and Operation Section 1 3 Program Execution in Cyclic Operation Cycle time Note The cycle time will vary slightly depending on the processing being performed in each cycle so the calculated cycle time will not always match the actual cycle time The following diagram shows the cyclic operation of the CPM2C S when the pro gram is being executed normally Normally the results of program execution are transferred to I O memory just after program execution during I O refreshing but IORF 97 can be used to re fresh a specified range of I O words during program execution The spe
283. the program is transferred from the CPT to the PC TKY MCMP DSW and 7SEG will be displayed on the CPT but will not be executed in the CPU Unit They will be treated as NOP 00 If expansion instructions are transferred to the PC with DM 6602 set to the de fault settings or if instructions not supported by the CPM2C S are transferred to the PC a message will be displayed saying that expansion instructions cannot be written because DIP switch pin 4 is OFF Change the setting of DM 6602 to enable user settings to use expansion instructions It will not be possible to transfer the program if the function codes assigned to expansion instructions 18 instructions have been changed from their default settings A message to turn ON the DIP switch of the PC and execute again will be displayed Change the function code assignments to the CQM1 defaults shown in the following table before programming Function code Default CPM2C S Assignments Default CQM1 Assignments 17 ASFT ASFT 18 TKY 19 MCMP 47 RXD RXD 48 TXD TXD 60 CMPL CMPL 61 INI INI 62 PRV PRV 63 CTBL CTBL 64 SPED SPED 65 PULS PULS 66 SCL SCL 67 BCNT BCNT 68 BCMP BCMP 69 STIM STIM 87 DSW 88 7SEG 89 INT INT There are four CPM2C S instructions STUP SYNC TIML and TMHH that are not supported by the CQM1 and cannot be used If one of these instruct
284. tion 7 4 Code Mnemonic ON execution Conditions Top min bottom max OFF execution time us time us 53 DVB 16 9 Constant constant gt word 2 6 18 6 Word word word 41 3 DM DM gt DM 54 ADDL 25 3 Word word word 2 6 48 6 DM DM DM 55 SUBL 25 3 Word word gt word 2 6 48 6 DM DM DM 56 MULL 79 1 Word x word word 2 6 102 1 DMx DM gt DM 57 DIVL 73 9 Word word word 2 6 98 6 DM DM gt DM 58 BINL 23 9 When converting word data to a word 2 6 38 5 When converting DMto DM 59 BCDL 19 1 When converting word data to a word 2 6 33 7 When converting DMto DM 60 CMPL 14 8 Comparing words 2 6 30 6 Comparing DM 61 INI 68 8 Starting high speed counter comparison 2 6 12 0 Stopping high speed counter comparison 43 3 Specifying a constant when changing high speed counter PV 51 8 Specifying DM when changing high speed counter PV 42 8 Specifying increment mode via constant 50 8 Specifying increment mode via DM 60 1 Stopping pulse output 42 7 Specifying a constant when changing pulse out put PV 50 7 Speen DM when changing pulse output 17 8 Stopping synchronized control of high speed counter 20 0 Specifying a constant when changing interrupt counter PV 27 6 Specifying DM when changing interrupt 142 counter PV One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 Code
285. tions Inputs Specification Input voltage All 24 VDC 10 _15 Input impedance IN00000 to INO0001 2 7 KQ IN00002 to INO0004 3 9 KQ IN00005 4 7 KQ Input current INO0000 to IN00001 8 mA typical IN00002 to IN00004 6 mA typical INO0005 5 mA typical ON voltage current INOO000 to INO0001 17 VDC min 5 mA IN00002 and up 14 4 VDC min 3 5 mA OFF voltage current All 5 0 VDC max 1 1 mA ON delay All 1 to 80 ms max Default 10 ms See note OFF delay All 1 to 80 ms max Default 10 ms See note Circuit configuration INOO000 to INO0001 Internal circuits INO0002 to IN00004 Internal circuits COM Q INOO005 Internal circuits com O input Leo SY Note The input time constant can be set to 1 2 3 5 10 20 40 or 80 ms in the PC Setup 35 Unit Components Section 2 2 High speed Counter Inputs The following CPU Unit input bits can be used as high speed counter inputs The maximum count frequency is 5 kHz in differential phase mode and 20 kHz in the other modes Function Differential phase mode A phase pulse input Pulse input Pulse plus direction input mode Up down input mode Increment pulse input Increment mode Increment pulse input B phase pulse input Direction input Decrement pulse input Normal input Z phase pulse input or hardware reset input INO0002 can be used as a normal input
286. to F Hex Do not store records 04 to 07 Not used 08 to 11 Cycle time monitor enable 0 Hex Generate a non fatal error for a cycle time that is too long 1 Hex Do not generate a non fatal error 12 to 15 Low battery error enable 0 Hex Generate a non fatal error for low battery voltage 1 Hex Do not generate a non fatal error Note If an out of range value is set the following communications conditions will re sult In that case reset the value so that it is within the permissible range Communications mode Host Link Communications format Standard settings 1 start bit 7 bit data even parity 2 stop bits 9 600 bps Transmission delay No Node number 00 4 7 Basic PC Operation and I O Processes This section explains the PC Setup settings related to basic operation and I O processes 4 7 1 Startup Mode The operating mode the PC will start in when power is turned on can be set as shown below Bit 15 0 DM6600 Eo ee Startup Mode Designation 00 Hex See note below 01 Hex Operating mode last used before power was turned OFF 02 Hex Mode set in bits 00 to 07 Startup Mode Bits 08 to 15 Valid when bits 00 to 07 are set to 02 00 Hex PROGRAM mode 01 Hex MONITOR mode 02 Hex RUN mode Note When the startup mode designation is set to 00 the operating mode at startup depends upon the connected Programming Device and the setting on pin 4
287. to maintain the status of the bit after the key is released In this case the force set status is indicated by an S and the force reset status is indicated by an R To return the bit to its original status press the NOT Key or perform the Clear Force Set Reset operation Refer to 8 4 25 Clear Force Set Reset for de tails Forced status will also be cleared in the following cases a When the PC s operating mode is changed although the forced status will not be cleared when the mode is changed from PROGRAM to MON ITOR if SR 25211 is ON b When the PC stops because a fatal error occurred Programming Console Operations Section 8 4 c When the PC stops because of a power interruption d When the Clear Force Set Reset Operation is performed 8 4 25 Clear Force Set Reset This operation is used to restore the status of all bits which have been force set or reset It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Z N Caution Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion I O Units may operate unex pectedly 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the SET an
288. to the input Then enter the correct input The buzzer will sound if a value outside the specified range is input allowing no writing 8 4 24 Force Set Reset 192 N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to force bits ON force set or OFF force reset and is useful when debugging the program or checking output wiring It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion I O Units may operate unex pectedly 1 Monitor the status of the desired bit according to the procedure described in 8 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor lf two or more words are being monitored the desired bit should be leftmost on the display Multiple address monitor 2 Press the SET Key to force the bit ON or press the RESET Key to force the bit OFF The cursor in the lower left corner of the display indicates that the force set reset is in progress Bit status will remain ON or OFF only as long as the key is held down the original status will return one cycle after the key is re leased 3 Press the SHIFT and SET Keys or SHIFT and RESET Keys
289. tor 117 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 you are using a Configurator version earlier than 2 0 The version can be dis played in the Configurator s Help menu 1 2 3 1 Connect the DeviceNet Configurator to the DeviceNet network and switch to online operation 2 Turn ON the CPM2C S power supply and put the PC in PROGRAM mode Click the Upload Button 4 Double click the CPM2C S to be set on the DeviceNet Configurator s device list ie 5 The DeviceNet Parameters Window will be displayed to edit the read and write area parameters Double click the read write area parameters to be changed Edit Device Parameters Parameter Group fan parameters x Parameter Name fale e A 0001 Max number of CompoBus S t 32 Node 0002 CompoBus S communications High Speed Communication 0003 PLC status ON OFF ON 0004 Write area size 16 byte 0005 Write area name clo 0 49 0006 Write Address 30 ch 0007 Read Size 16 byte 0008 Read Area clo 0 49 0009 Read Address 20 ch an 5 zi Help Set the Max number of connectible Aj Default 32 Node CompoBus S terminals Zi Upload Download Compare Reset Default Setup Cancel 6 Change the parameters as shown in the following example 118 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 a Double click the parameter to be changed Edit Device Parameters Parameter Group jan parameters 7
290. unications are completed If the cycle time is shorter than the CompoBus S communica tions response time the CPU will wait until CompoBus S communications are completed before starting I O refreshing again In effect this delay re sults in a minimum cycle time equivalent to the CompoBus S communica tions response time 2 Even if the CompoBus S is not used the cycle time will never be shorter than the CompoBus S communications response time 3 The cycle time will be affected if there is a connection to a DeviceNet net work DRT models only Adjust the system while connected to the Device Net network 137 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 7 1 2 Cycle Time and Operations The effects of the cycle time on operations are as shown below When a long cycle time is affecting operation either reduce the cycle time or improve respon siveness with interrupt programs Cycle time Operation conditions 1 ms or longer TMHH may be inaccurate when TC 000 through TC 003 or TC 008 through TC 255 are used operation will be normal for TC 004 through TC 007 10 ms or longer TIMH 15 may be inaccurate when TC 004 through TC 255 are used operation will be normal for TC 000 through TC 003 20 ms or longer Programming using the 0 02 second Clock Bit SR 25401 may be inaccurate 100 ms or longer TIM may be inaccurate Programming using the 0 1 second Clock Bit SR 25500 may be inaccu rate ACYCLE TIM
291. unications mode to 1 1 PC CPM2C or a CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A SRM1 CQM1 Link in the PC Setup C200HS or C200HX HG HE PC Connect a Programming Console Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral Page port via the communications port Turn OFF 166 Communications Switch 2 Connect a personal computer running SYSMAC The computer can be connected to the peripheral port Page Support Software SSS or SYSMAC CPT Support or RS 232C port via the communications port 75 Software 155 Monitor equipment with a Programmable Terminal and The RS 232C port and peripheral port can be used W353 program the PC with a Programming Device simultaneously via the communications port Page 78 166 1 5 Comparison with the CPM2C Item CPM2C S CPM2C Instruction set Basic instructions 14 14 Special instructions 105 instructions 185 variations 105 instructions 185 variations Instruction Basic instructions LD 0 64 us LD 0 64 us execution times Special instructions MOV 21 7 8 us MOV 21 7 8 us Program capacity 4 096 words 4 096 words Maximum Stand alone CPU Unit 10 points 10 20 or 32 points number of I O GPU Unit with Expansion 362 points max 170 180 or 192 points max points 1O Units Expansion Maximum number of Units A maximum of 3 Units A maximum of 5 Units can be Units and connected to any of the CPU Expansion I O Units Units Available models Expansion I O Units Analog
292. upply connector included with the Unit 1 2 3 1 Align the power supply connector with the socket on the bottom of the CPM2C S and insert the connector Red lead 24 VDC Black lead 0 VDC 2 To remove the power supply connector grasp the power supply connector not the wires release the lock tab on the connector and remove the con nector Note 1 The CPM2C PA201 is the recommended Power Supply Unit but a general purpose power supply such as a S82J series or S82K series Power Supply can also be used When using other power supplies be sure to use a DC power supply with sufficient capacity and low ripple 59 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 2 Do not perform a voltage withstand test on the DC power supply terminals on the CPU Unit The test might damage the PC s internal components 3 When the equipment must conform to the EC Directives Low voltage Direc tives use a power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation 3 4 3 Using the AC Power Supply Unit Crimp Terminals Use round crimp terminals for wiring AC power supply to the AC Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 Use either crimp terminals or solid wires for wiring to the ground terminal or the service power supply terminals Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals e Use M3 5 terminal screws e Tighten the terminal screws securely to a torque of 0 74 to 0 9 Nem Use round terminals of the dimensions shown below Round
293. upt input 00003 is used in counter mode 4 digits hexadecimal Can be used as work bits when interrupt input 00003 is not used in counter mode SR 241 00 to 15 Interrupt Input 00004 Counter Mode SV SV when interrupt input 00004 is used in counter mode 4 digits hexadecimal Can be used as work bits when interrupt input 00004 is not used in counter mode SR 242 00to15 Not used SR 243 SR 244 00 to 15 Interrupt Input 00003 Counter Mode PV Read Counter PV when interrupt input 00003 is used in counter mode 4 digits hexadeci only mal SR 245 00 to 15 Interrupt Input 00004 Counter Mode PV Counter PV when interrupt input 00004 is used in counter mode 4 digits hexadeci mal SR 246 00to15 Not used SR 247 SR 248 00to15 High speed Counter PV Area Read SR 249 Can be used as work bits when the high speed counter is not used only SR 250 00to 15 Not used SR 251 SR 252 00 High speed Counter Reset Bit Read write 01 to 03 Not used 04 Pulse Output 0 PV Reset Bit Read Turn ON to clear the PV of pulse output 0 write 05 Pulse Output 1 PV Reset Bit Turn ON to clear the PV of pulse output 1 06 07 Not used 08 Peripheral Port Reset Bit Read Turn ON to reset the peripheral port Automatically turns OFF when reset is complete write 09 RS 232C Port Reset Bit Turn ON to reset the RS 232C port Automatically turns OFF when reset is complete 10 PC Setup Reset Bit Turn ON to initialize PC Setup DM 6600 through DM
294. urns ON when the PC is ready to transmit data No protocol and Host Link only 06 RS 232C Reception Completed Flag Turns ON when the PC has completed reading data No protocol only 07 RS 232C Reception Overflow Flag Turns ON when an overflow has occurred No protocol only 08 to 11 Peripheral Port Error Code 0 Normal completion 1 Parity error 2 Frame error 3 Overrun error 12 Peripheral Port Communications Error Flag Turns ON when a peripheral port communications error occurs 13 Peripheral Port Transmit Ready Flag Turns ON when the PC is ready to transmit data No protocol and Host Link only 14 Peripheral Port Reception Completed Flag Turns ON when the PC has completed reading data No protocol only 15 Peripheral Port Reception Overflow Flag Turns ON when an overflow has occurred No protocol only 00 to 15 RS 232C Port Reception Counter 4 digits BCD Valid only when no protocol communications are used 00 to 15 Peripheral Port Reception Counter 4 digits BCD Valid only when no protocol communications are used 93 PC Setup i Word s Section Function High speed Counter Range Comparison Flags 00 ON Counter PV is within comparison range 1 01 ON Counter PV is within comparison range 2 02 ON Counter PV is within comparison range 3 03 ON Counter PV is within comparison range 4 04 ON Counter PV is within comparison range 5 05 ON Counte
295. utions system checks configuration 7 temperature operating storage Temperature Sensor Units See also Expansion Units available models terminal blocks connections test run example procedure thermocouple timers changing SV Programming Console example of inputting timing basic instructions T O response time instruction execution See instruction interrupt processing special instructions troubleshooting fatal errors T O errors non fatal errors operating conditions power supply U W unsigned decimal data modifying Programming Console monitoring uploading programs vibration resistance voltage operating voltage range output connections supply voltage wiring T O connectors power supply write protecting the program PC Setup settings 241 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W377 E1 1 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Date Revised content November 2000 Original production 243 omron Authorized Distributor Xe S Cat No W377 E1 1 Note Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in Japan
296. ven when the interrupt condition is met if the in put is not ON long enough b Input indicators will reflect the status of the corresponding inputs even when the PC is stopped but the corresponding input bits will not be refreshed 7 Output Indicators The output indicators are lit when the corresponding output terminal is ON The indicators are lit during I O refreshing The status of an output indicator will also reflect the status of the corresponding output when the output is be ing used as a pulse output 8 Communications Port Connects the PC to a Programming Device including Programming Consoles host computer or standard external device Use a proper Con necting Cable CPM2C CN111 CS1W CN114 or CS1W CN118 Note a A CQM1H PROO1 E Programming Console can be connected di rectly to the PC b A C200H PRO27 E Programming Console can be connected di rectly to the PC with a CS1W CN224 CN624 Connecting Cable Use a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 Connecting Cable to con nect to the communications port as a peripheral port The commu nications port can be used simultaneously as both a peripheral port and RS 232C port by using the CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable Use a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN118 Connecting Cable to con nect to the communications port as a RS 232C port The commu nications port can be used simultaneously as both a peripheral port and RS 232C port by using the CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable 9 DIP Switch The DIP
297. vironmental conditions check Consider using a fan or cooler Is the ambient temperature 2 Is the ambient temperature above 0 C Consider using a heater Is the ambient humidity between 10 and Consider using an air conditioner Install surge protec tors or other noise reducing equipment at noise sources Is noise being controlled Consider constructing an instrument panel or cabinet Is the installation environment okay Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 9 5 Memory Error Check Memory error occurred Yes Replace the CPU AR 1309 ON Unit No Yes Check correct backed up data and 2 AR 1314 ON clear error No Yes Check the program correct any AR 1308 ON errors and clear the error Check the error indicated by Yes the flag that is ON correct set Yes AR 1310 to Turned ON during DE ISISONE startup tings as required and write data to the flash memory No No Check the external environment End 217 Section 9 6 Maintenance Inspections 9 6 Maintenance Inspections In order for your SYSMAC system to operate in optimum condition be sure to carry out daily or periodical inspections Inspection Items Inspection items Power supply The main system components of a SYSMAC system are semiconductors and it contains few components with limited lifetimes Poor environmental conditions however can lead t
298. when a settings error occurred OFF when normal 01 Node number duplication or Bus off error ON when an error occurred OFF when normal 02 DeviceNet network power supply error ON when an error occurred OFF when normal 03 DeviceNet communications error ON when an error occurred OFF when normal 04 to 06 Not used 07 DeviceNet status error ON when an error occurred OFF when normal 08 Explicit Connection Flag ON The connection has been established 09 Polling Connection Flag OFF The connection has not been established 10 Bit Strobe Connection Flag 11 to 14 Not used 15 I O Link in progress ON when the I O Link is operating otherwise OFF 6 4 3 CPM2C S Status Output to DeviceNet The operating status of the CPM2C S is transmitted to the Master Unit in two words The status information is automatically attached as the first two words received at the Master The setting in DM 6605 bits 04 to 07 of the PC Setup determines whether or not the status information will be transmitted Word Bits Function Default DM 6605 04 to 07 Sets whether CPM2C S status is transmitted to 0 the DeviceNet Master Attach 0 Hex Attach status ahead of data status 1 Hex Do not attach status ahead of data A settings error will occur for any other setting 133 Explicit Message Communications Section 6 3 Transmitted Status Information Contents
299. xample This section demonstrates all of the steps needed to write a program with the Programming Console 8 5 1 Preparatory Operations Use the following procedure when writing a program to the CPM2C S for the first time 1 2 3 1 Set the Programming Console s mode switch to PROGRAM mode and turn on the CPM2C S power supply The password input display will appear on the Programming Console MONITOR RUN PROGRAM N 7 a 2 Enter the password by pressing the CLR and then the MONTR Key MONTR 3 Clear the CPM2C S memory by pressing the CLR SET NOT RESET and then the MONTR Key Press the CLR Key several times if memory errors are displayed CLR lt O Zz J 4 Display and clear error messages by pressing the CLR FUN and then the MONTR Key Continue pressing the MONTR Key until all error messages have been cleared CLR FUN MONTR 5 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial programming display program ad dress 00000 The new program can be written at this point CLR N Caution Check the system thoroughly before starting or stopping the CPM2C S to pre vent any accidents that might occur when the program is first started 195 Programming Example Section 8 5 8 5 2 Example Program The following ladder program will be used to demonstrate how to write a pro gram with the Progr
300. y thing else Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2000 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permis sion of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa tion contained in this publication TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS easa tonsa keee sence ee ae ee ks 1 Interided AUGience soe aie sis Seneca Rais Boe doe a a Ee seeds 2 General Precautions 4 00264 weseeaepe Gee hanes Hoe eased ea Gated OSS RTE ST GS eR E He 3 Safety Precautions aon iieo ts Se RR See te eA He ois Poe Meee Se 4 Operating Environment Precautions
301. ying DM in independent mode 42 9 Specifying a constant in continuous pulse out put mode 52 0 Specifying DM in continuous pulse output mode 34 1 Specifying a word when changing output fre quency 39 8 Specifying DM when changing output fre quency 2 6 144 One to one PC Link I O Response Time Section 7 4 Mnemonic ON execution Conditions Top min bottom max OFF execution time us time us 65 PULS 38 4 Specifying a relative pulse for the set pulse out 2 6 put via a word 46 6 Specifying a relative pulse for the set pulse out put via DM 40 0 Specifying an absolute pulse for the set pulse output via a word 48 1 Specifying an absolute pulse for the set pulse output via DM 66 SCL 37 9 Specifying a parameter word constant to word 2 6 39 2 Specifying a parameter word word to word 59 9 Specifying a parameter DM DMto DM 67 BCNT 24 9 When counting 1 word 2 6 4 32 ms When counting 2 048 words via DM 68 BCMP 35 3 Comparing constant results to word 2 6 38 3 Comparing word results to word 58 1 Comparing DM results to DM 69 STIM 25 7 Constant set one shot interrupt start 2 6 47 8 DM set one shot interrupt start 25 9 Constant set scheduled interrupt start 47 8 DM set scheduled interrupt start 34 0 Constant set timer read 46 4 DM set timer read

CPM2C-S - Valtek

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents